JP6540454B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine provided with a first moving means and a second moving means supported so as to be movable relative to the first moving means, and the second moving means is moved relative to the first moving means Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-147411, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation method of the second moving means.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation method of the second moving means.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, a predetermined member, a first moving means which is configured to reciprocate between a first position is supported at a predetermined member and the second position And at least a second moving means supported by the first moving means, and a driving means for driving the first moving means, wherein the second moving means is in a first direction with respect to the first moving means. It is possible to configure a first state of relative movement, and a second state in which the resistance at the time of relative movement between the first movement means and the second movement means is increased compared to the first state. a gaming machine, switching between the second state and said first state, said first moving means, when moving from the first position to the second position, the first position and the second when passing through the third position between the position, said second moving means, at least the 1 occurs by moving the second direction different from the moving means and accepted before Symbol first direction loads.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, comprising a substrate box .

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the operation method of the second moving means.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the substrate can be accommodated in the substrate box.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a variable winning prize apparatus. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning apparatus, (b) is a front view of the variable winning apparatus, (c) is a side view of the variable winning apparatus in the arrow XVc direction view of FIG. is there. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15 (b), and (b) is a variable winning device after sliding the movable top member from FIG. 16 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit at line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit at line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17 (a), (C) is sectional drawing of the board lower part which changed arrangement | positioning of the light irradiation part virtually from FIG.18 (b). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 7 is a rear exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swing member. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swing member. (A) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 1st guide arm, (c) is a 1st guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guiding arm along the line XXVd-XXVd in FIG. 25A. (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26 (a). 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guiding arm along the line XXVId-XXVId in FIG. 26A. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, a 2nd guide arm, and wiring. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28. FIG. 33 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line XXXV-XXXV of FIG. 32. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. 36. It is a front perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a rocking movement unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a side view of the rocking operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXXIIb of FIG. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member, the driven-side arm member, and the first bridging member along line XXXXIVa-XXXXIVa in FIG. 43, and (b) is a drive-side arm along line XXXXIVb-XXXXIVb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a driven side arm member, and a 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit in the arrow XXXXVa direction view of FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) show the driven side arm member bent to the front side from the state of FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit, showing the state of the movement in time series. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member taken along line XXXXIV-XXXXIV in FIG. 43. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the rocking operation unit in the XXXXV-XXXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) is a front view of the rocking operation unit in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit along line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a combined operation unit. It is a rear view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of a compound operation unit. It is a partial front view of the compound operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a combined operation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the gaming board on the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 60. (A) is a front view of the 1st guide arm in a 9th embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st guide arm, (c) is a perspective view of a desorption front stop member . (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st guide arm of a wiring guide arm and a 2nd guide arm, (c) is the 1st of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of a guide arm and a 2nd guide arm. It is a front perspective view of the operation | movement unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line LXXI-LXXI of FIG. 66. FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a two-way operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a two-way operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a two-way operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a two-way operation unit. It is a front view of the transmission convex part of a disc member, and an abutting member. (A) is a graph which shows the displacement of the up-down direction of the operation member in the case of rotating a disk member at constant speed, (b) is the up-down direction of the operation member in the case where a disk member is rotated at constant speed. It is a graph which shows the moving speed of. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit in the eleventh embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the LXXII-LXXII line in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along the line corresponding to line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit taken along the line corresponding to line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68. It is a front view of a disc member and a contact member. (A) is a graph which shows the displacement of the up-down direction of the operation member in the case of rotating a disk member at constant speed, (b) is the up-down direction of the operation member in the case where a disk member is rotated at constant speed. It is a graph which shows the moving speed of. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 12th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, as well as a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown). , 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 330, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the lower panel unit 300 fitted into the receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball fired to the game board 13. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). The number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetric, so aiming at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" may also aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). It can be unnecessary to change "right-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done. Although the details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a will be described later, to be briefly described, the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to move the specific winning opening 65a. It is opened and closed.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A ball that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 314. The out ports 314 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 433, 462, 551 and solenoids 474.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, the gaming board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 400 and 500 in the back case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, one side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 at the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b capable of fastening a member to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the front side of the intermediate wall 212a, the outer wall 212 extends from the end opposite to the opening 211a of the intermediate wall 212a, and on the back of the intermediate wall 212a, the outer wall 212 is an intermediate wall It extends from the end on the side close to the opening 211a of 212a.

  The holding and fixing portion 446 and the fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and the guide plate 424 is formed on the fastening portions 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Are fastened and fixed.

  Here, the fixed plate 461 is a member for supporting the drive motor 462 that generates a driving force for driving the combined operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member for fixing one end of the biasing spring 445. Is a member for guiding the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the combined operation unit 400. That is, they are not part of the effect directly viewed by the player, but are part having an auxiliary role of the effect of generating the driving force of the operation of the combined operation unit 400 or guiding the operation. .

  By arranging the fixing plate 461 having such a role, the holding fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 closer to the front side of the rear case 210, a space closer to the rear side of the rear case 210 can be provided. By using the vacant space on the back side as a space for evacuating a portion visually recognized by the player, such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the combined operation unit 400 can be stacked back and forth, and the opening 211a The width required for evacuating the combined operation unit 400 can be narrowed. Therefore, the formation width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be narrowed. Thereby, the opening 211a can be expanded, and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

  In the operation unit 200, the combined operation unit 400 and the rocking operation unit 500 are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, combined operation unit 400 is disposed on the left, right, and above the region formed by the inner side surface of outer wall 212 of rear case 210, and rocking operation unit 500 is located within outer wall 212 of rear case 210. The side surface is disposed below the formed area (see FIG. 5).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, an outline of operation modes of the combined operation unit 400 and the rocking operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate.

  7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. Note that the state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed in the extended position in FIG. 7 is the state in which the moving member 540 in the swing operation unit 500 is disposed in the extended position in FIG. The state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the rocking operation unit 500 are disposed in the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the combined operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. 7. That is, at the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the extended position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is disposed at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) . The compound operation unit 400 is a unit that performs two types of operations (sliding operation and rocking operation) in which the shielding member 420 moves differently as the main body member 410 slides as described later.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the rocking operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is disposed at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display 81, see FIG. 2) . The moving members 540 are formed as a pair of left and right, and at the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the combined operation unit 400 and the rocking operation unit 500 can both be arranged in the extended position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the rocking operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integral decorative member (partially overlapped in front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the width of the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the rendering effects of the combined operation unit 400 and the rocking operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, as the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 project toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (down and up), for example, as compared with the case where all the movable members are extended in the same direction, The distance by which each member moves from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened. As a result, when the moving speeds of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are the same, it is possible to shorten the time period for moving from the retracted position to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 18, the lower board unit 300 disposed at the lower part of the game board 13 will be described. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. 10 shows that only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game version 13, and in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the lower board unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. Also, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning hole 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed of a curved shape convex downward, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is compared to the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left and right direction. It can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65 a is formed by the moving upper lid member 332 at the upper side, the lower side by the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides by the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 .

  The specific winning opening 65a is switched between the closed state and the open state described above by sliding the movable upper lid member 332 back and forth as described later, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It is possible to repeat once (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIG. 11, the lower board unit 300 is a unit constituting an out port 314 from which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65a, and is received in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction A front unit 310 inserted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed thereto, a front plate member 320 fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and having a ball path formed on the back side, and a receiving opening 60a And a variable winning device 330 mainly provided with a movable top member 332 which is fitted and fixed from the rear side and which changes the flow-down direction of the ball.

  The front unit 310 has a plate-like main plate portion 311 in which a ball can flow downward on the front side, and an electric part 640 a having a pair of members opened and closed in the center on the front side of the main plate portion 311. A plate-like inclined plate portion 312 provided on the front side at the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311, an opening upper side portion 313 recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311, and an opening upper side thereof It mainly comprises a pair of out ports 314 which are pierced in the front and rear direction on the left and right sides of the part 313 and the balls are discharged out of the game area.

  Body plate portion 311 is formed in the front and rear direction at a position surrounded by a first winning opening lower side 311a formed above motorized part 640a and forming the lower side of first winning opening 64 and a pair of members of motorized part 640a. A second winning opening 640 to be provided, a light irradiation device 311 b disposed below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and a rib shape on the outside of the out opening 314 directed to the front side And a ball-sinking rib 311c which is provided in a convex shape.

  The light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodation recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (to the second prize opening 640) due to the ball winning on the second prize opening 640. Is an LED member to be irradiated with light.

  The ball-sinking rib 311 c adjusts the flow-down direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

  The inclined plate portion 312 is formed such that a ball can roll on the upper side, and is disposed on the left and right of the motorized accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as it gets closer to the motorized accessory 640a. Thereby, when the electric utility product 640a is in the open state in which the electric utility product 640a falls to the left or right, the ball rolled down the inclined plate portion 312 can be made to win the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, in the closed state where the motorized accessory 640a is erected, the ball rolled down the inclined plate portion 312 can be dropped to the front side of the upper opening portion 313 with high probability.

  The opening upper portion 313 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes to the left and right center. Here, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper side portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning hole 65a by making the vertical width of the horizontal direction central portion of the specific winning hole 65a equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball. Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to win the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball flows down to the central portion of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the horizontal center of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win from, the game can be continued.

  Here, when the upper and lower sides of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel planes (planes extending in the left-right direction), the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 is the same as the length of the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a, It is necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and arrange it. Therefore, the position of the specific winning combination opening 65a becomes high.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved in the same manner as the lower side of the inner rail 61, there is no need to raise the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is at a low position. Can be placed.

  Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right end portions, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is compared to the case where the upper side surface is formed by a flat surface extending in the left and right direction. You can lower the placement of the nails to guide you down. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The out-port 314 is formed in a pair on the left and right of the upper opening 313. The lower side of the out-port 314 is disposed below with respect to the left and right ends of the open upper portion 313, and the upper side of the out-port 314 is disposed upward. Ru. That is, the upper opening 313 is formed below the out port 314. Thereby, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330 described later can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even in such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the ball is allowed to flow down the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 having the upper surface substantially the same shape as the shape of the opening upper portion 313 and slidingly moved in the longitudinal direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-like member formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the front unit 310 and is formed so that a sphere can flow between the main plate portion 311 and the front plate. , And a first winning opening front 322 for guiding a ball to the lower end of the first winning opening 311a and disposed below the electric role piece 640a. And a lower electric outlet lower plate 324 disposed along the lower side surface of the out port 314 and a rear side protruding from the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 The ball feeding unit 325 is mainly provided.

  The main body plate portion 321 includes, at the outer side of the out-out lower plate 324, a ball-sinking rib 321a which is convexly provided on the back side. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow-down direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electrically driven accessory lower support portion 323 includes a housing recess 323a which is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a.

  A thin rib extending in the front-rear direction is continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper side surface of the out-hole lower plate 324. In addition, the out-port lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324 a that protrudes upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out-hole lower plate 324 can decelerate the ball that has flowed down. Further, the rib formed on the out-port lower plate 324 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes to the back side. Thereby, the speed which discharges the ball which flowed down to out mouth 314 can be improved.

  In addition, since the above-described inclined plate portion 312 is formed right above the out-hole lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), a ball falling after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed to the out-hole lower plate 324 Falling is suppressed. That is, the balls falling after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 fall inward in the left-right direction of the pair of out-out lower plates 324 (the position where the moving upper lid member 332 is disposed) It falls either on the outer end (in the vicinity of the ball-sinking rib 321a and at the boundary between the formation area of the rib and the rail through which the ball flows). These are both outside the formation range of the rib. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl falls from height to the out-port lower plate 324, and the durability of the out-port lower plate 324 can be improved.

  The step 324a is a step formed between the out port 314 and the specific winning port 65a, and the ball flowing down from the left and right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 exceeds the step 324a. Flow to the central portion in the lateral direction is prevented (see FIG. 17). That is, the ball flowing down from the left and right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out-hole lower plate 324 is guided only to the out-port 314.

  The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side, and a left and right side surface 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The rear side 325a is inclined downward toward the rear, and the left side 325b is inclined toward the center toward the rear. Thereby, the flow-down direction of the ball which reached ball sending part 325 can be turned to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the ball stays in front of the specific winning hole 65a, and to prevent so-called over winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (a) is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 has a main body member 331 forming a frame, and a movable upper lid member 332 which is inserted from the front into the main body member 331 and is slidably movable in the front and rear direction. A solenoid 333 for generating a driving force for sliding the movable upper lid member 332 and a rear lid member 334 which accommodates a lever member 334 b pivoted by the solenoid 333 and which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331 And mainly.

  The main body member 331 is disposed below the lower passage 331b of the deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, the lower passage 331b in which the ball winning in the specified winning hole 65a flows downward, and directed upward Mainly includes: a light irradiation device 331c for irradiating light; and a back side accommodation portion 331d which is a recess formed to be concave toward the front side on the back side and in which the solenoid 333 and the lever member 334b and the like are accommodated. .

  The deformed through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the movable cover member 332, as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), and is a front that accommodates the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 that accommodates the rear plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a hollow having a pentagonal shape in which the lower side extends horizontally in a front view, the upper side is inclined upward as it goes to the center, and the left and right side sides extend vertically.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening that is drilled in a shape in which the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 are cut off from the central portion on the back side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a do not have steps in the front-rear direction but are formed at surface positions. Thereby, the movable upper lid member 332 can be guided smoothly.

  The lower passage 331b is a passage which is formed by a pair of left and right so that a ball can pass (see FIG. 18 (a)) and which protrudes downward below the lower edge of the inner rail 61. The sensor S which detects the passage of is disposed (see FIG. 15 (b)).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-like portion 332a1, and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (the lower portion of the receiving opening 60a). As a result, since devices necessary for the light irradiation device 331c can be disposed below the inner rail 61, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) lower edge can be lowered.

  The light irradiation device 331 c includes a light irradiation unit 331 c 1 that emits light. The light irradiation part 331c1 is formed right below the lower passage 331b in a pair, and emits light upward.

  The rear side accommodation portion 331 d is in communication with the front opening 331 a 1 with the rear opening 331 a 2 interposed therebetween.

  The movable upper lid member 332 is an elongated member formed of a light transmissive resin material, and includes a front side plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1, and a rear side plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c protruding downward along the central axis of the front side plate portion 332a and the rear side plate portion 332b, and a connection hole 332d vertically formed in the rear side end portion of the rear side plate portion 332b; Prepare mainly.

  The front side plate portion 332a is formed in the vertical direction of the plate-like portion 332a1 and the plate-like portion 332a1 which are formed to be inclined upward toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening 331a1. A lightening hole 332a2 is mainly provided, and a guide rib 332a3 which is extended downward in the left-right direction end of the plate-like portion 332a1 and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-like portion 332a1 is provided with a front inclined side 332a1f which is formed to be inclined to the back side as it goes downward (see FIG. 16) and to be recessed to the back side as it goes to the lateral center. When the front inclined side 332a1f is recessed toward the back side toward the center in the left-right direction, the ball can flow to the center when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side 332a1f It is possible to prevent the ball from blocking the sliding operation of the movable top member 332.

  In addition, since the front inclined side 332 a 1 f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to reflect light effectively, a metal film is formed on the front inclined side 332 a 1 f or mirror processing is performed. You may. In the present embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  The guide ribs 332a3 are formed along the left and right sides of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15), and abut on the lower side of the front opening 331a1. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation in the left-right direction when the movable top member 332 slides.

  The center rib 332 c is formed at a bent portion of the front side plate portion 332 a formed by bending a plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side plate portion 332a can be improved. In addition, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is retracted), it is held on the back side of the upper opening portion 313. Thus, it is possible to prevent the movement upper lid member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the central rib 332 c and the ball.

  The connection hole 332 d is a through hole through which the connection portion 334 b 4 of the lever member 334 b is inserted, and displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334 b is transmitted to the movable top member 332 (see FIG. 16).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a driving source and a wedge-shaped wedge member 333b disposed below the main body 333a and vertically moved below the lever member 334b.

  The rear cover member 334 mainly includes a plate-like main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a so as to be pivotable and having a tip movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 projecting in a columnar shape in the left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1, and pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a A lower claw portion 334b3 which extends downward from the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed so as to be able to accommodate the wedge-shaped member 333b between itself and the main body portion 334b1 And a connecting portion 334b4 which is formed to expand in a cylindrical shape.

  Next, the sliding movement of the movable top member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.16 (a) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 330 in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG.15 (b), FIG.16 (b) moves the sliding upper lid member 332 from the state of Fig.16 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning prize apparatus 330 after making it let. 16A shows the retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed rearward, and FIG. 16B shows the extended state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed forwardly. In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1, the illustration of the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the wedge-shaped member 333b is disposed upward, and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down the front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be hit (opened) at the specified winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state, the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2 by pressing the wedge-shaped member 333b downward. The movable top member 332 is slid to the front side while being in contact with the side surface of the side accommodation portion 331b. In this state, the ball can not be won (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end of the wedge-shaped member 333b abuts on the end of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, whereby the swinging of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The wedge-shaped member 333b is disposed in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the wedge-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334 b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the path of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation part 331c1 reaches the front inclined side 332a1f of the plate part 332a1 along the path E1. Do. At this time, since the front inclined side 332 a 1 f is formed to be inclined to the back side as it goes downward, the light which is emitted from below and reaches the front inclined side 332 a 1 f is reflected forward (to the player). In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize as if the front inclined side surface 332al of the movable top member 332 is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected to the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be made to pay attention. Thereby, the rendering capabilities of the movable top member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, in the case where the movable upper cover member 332 is provided with an LED or the like to make the movable upper cover member 332 emit light, there is a possibility that the upper movement cover member 332 may become larger. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not disposed on the movable upper lid member 332, the capability of the movable upper lid member 332 as a rendering part is improved while suppressing the enlargement of the movable upper lid member 332. Can.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the movable upper lid member 332 is in an extended state, light is emitted upward from the light irradiator 331 c 1 along the path E 2 and light toward the front inclined side 332 a 1 f The front side inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 is not reached by being shielded. In this case, the light irradiated from the light irradiator 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-like portion 332a1 of the front side plate portion 332a and only passes through as it is, so the front inclined side 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is perceived dark by the player.

  That is, depending on whether the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state or in the extended state, whether or not the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes and the front plate Whether or not the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is perceived as bright changes. Therefore, by confirming the state of the brightness of the light emitting range E0 of the front inclined surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball in the specified winning opening 65a.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even if the change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 is difficult to grasp in a front view because the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth (FIGS. 17A and 17B (b (See)), it is possible to easily check whether or not it is possible to win a ball in the specified winning combination opening 65a by the change of the brightness of the light projection range E0.

  Here, the movement upper lid member 332 is required to form a closed state that prevents the passage of the ball to the specified winning opening 65a and an open state that allows the passage of the ball to the specified winning opening 65a ( The state of the brightness of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the back and forth slide movement). In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the movable top member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the movable upper lid member 332 can be used both for the purpose of switching whether or not the ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and for the purpose of performing effects by the light emitted from the light irradiation portion 331c1.

  In addition, when the ball passes through the lower passage 331b, the light emitted from the light irradiator 331c may be reflected by the sphere by crossing the path E1 to perform rendering. In this case, it is possible to brightly illuminate the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIG. 16A and FIG. 17B) in a front view.

  With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the balls in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state and in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state will be described. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial front views of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 17A shows the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 16B), and FIG. 17B shows the movable upper lid member 332 in the retracted state (FIG. 16B). The case of forming (a) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), it is shown whether or not the movable top member 332 is extended depending on whether or not it is shaded. That is, in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the portion where the hatching is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate to such an extent that the passage of the ball with the front plate member 320 is blocked. It is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the ball falling on the path C 2 flows down along the upper surface of the movable top member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the weight of the ball may cause the movable upper lid member 332 to tilt downward, and the balls are discharged to the out port 314 when the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 are moved lower than the step 324a. It becomes impossible and it interferes with the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 has a length several times that of the length projected on the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times the length, see FIG. 16B). It is accommodated in the deformed through hole 331 a and is formed to be able to vertically and vertically contact the side surface of the deformed through hole 331 a in the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the movable upper cover member 332 and the deformed through hole 331a, it is possible to suppress that the movable upper cover member 332 falls down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the movable upper cover member 332. As a result, the left and right end portions of the movable upper lid member 332 can be formed in the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the nail to the specified winning hole 65a can be lowered downward. The edge can be lowered downwards.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning hole 65a. At this time, the balls rolling along the inner rail 61 in the path C1 from the left and right collide with the step 324a and are discharged to the out port 314, so the balls falling in the path C2 from above toward the specific winning hole 65a Roll on the inner rail 61 to reach the specific winning hole 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed equal to or less than the diameter of the ball. That is, the distance in the vertical direction from the inner rail 61 at the left and right end portions of the movable top member 332 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height from the inner rail 61 of the step portion 324a can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out ports 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a can be lowered.

  Also, in this case, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning hole 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a is rotated along the inner rail 61 toward the center of the game area by gravity. It is moved and enters the specified winning hole 65a from there. In addition, since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to incline rearward (see FIG. 16), the ball can be smoothly entered into the specified winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

  Thereby, the movable upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 by at least the center of the game area (near the inner rail 61 is disposed at the lowermost position). Since the movement top cover 332 can be moved down, the arrangement position of the movable top cover 332 can be lowered. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered downward as compared with the case where it is necessary to separate upward from the inner rail 61 by more than the diameter of the ball at a position other than near the center of the inner rail 61. Thereby, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, functions of the ball-sinking ribs 311 c and 321 a and the ball feeding portion 325 and the fact that light is condensed by the front inclined side surface 332 a 1 f will be described. 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (b), and FIG. 18 (b) is a lower panel unit 300 taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation parts 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18B.

  In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the ball is described by paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the movable upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The movable upper lid member 332 is on the near side (upper side in FIG. 17B) than the cross section in FIG. 18A and is not actually recognized, but for the convenience of description 18 (a) is illustrated by an imaginary line when the positions in the vertical direction are aligned. Moreover, in FIG.18 (b) and FIG.18 (c), three balls which flow down the downward path | pass 331b are hypothetically | virtually illustrated.

  The path of the ball which is rolled along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) from the left and right direction and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ball rolling toward the center in FIG. 18A from the left and right direction abuts on at least one of the ball flow rib 311c or the ball flow rib 321a. That is, the balls rolling rolling in contact with the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abut the ball sinking rib 311 c and the balls rolling rolling in contact with the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 are ball sinking ribs Contact with 321a.

  Here, when the ball abuts against the flow-through rib 311c, the velocity direction of the ball is directed in the direction along the path C1a, and then it abuts against the flow-through rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, It can be made to abut on the rib 321a.

  By bringing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) into contact with the flow-through rib 321a, it is possible to turn the speed direction of the ball in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18A) from before the ball is disposed on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 to when the ball is discharged from the game area, and to suppress the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314 While being possible, the opening width of out mouth 314 can be controlled. As a result, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out-port 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the gaming area.

  The case where the balls fall between the stepped portions 324a arranged in parallel in a pair will be described. In this case, the ball dropped between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the balls abut on the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feeding portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the balls is along the path C2a. Change. As a result, the ball can be prevented from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), so that the over winning can be suppressed.

  When the ball flows down along the lower passage 331 b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiator 331 c 1, the light shields the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side 332 a 1 f. Therefore, whether the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) or not can be confirmed depending on whether the front inclined side 332a1f or the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 is visually recognized bright or dark it can.

  Thus, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmissive resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. Also, it is possible to confirm that the ball has entered the specified winning combination opening 65a by the change of the brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, there is no need to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to ease the burden on the player.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 331c1 and the flow-down direction of the ball flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a as compared to the case where the ball flows downward while facing the light traveling direction (see FIG. 18C) or the ball flows downward along the light irradiation direction. It is possible to shorten a period in which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b shields the light. In other words, the period in which the front inclined side 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate 320 can be seen bright can be extended, and the rendering ability of the front inclined side 332a1f and the front plate 320 can be secured.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow-down direction of the ball flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the ball After that, near the point where the ball passes the front end of the lower passage 331b (right side in FIG. 18B), the light is not blocked by the ball (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

  In this case, even if balls continue to flow downward through the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each ball, so the change in brightness of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side 332a1f and the front plate member 320 By confirming, it is possible to confirm the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, if the light path E3 and the flow-down direction of the ball flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, after the light path E3 is blocked by the ball, When the ball reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331 b (left side in FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the ball (so that the light reaches the front inclined side 332 a 1 f Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the ball.

  In this case, when a series of balls flows down the lower passage 331b, the light path E3 is blocked by the first ball (the ball on the left side of FIG. 18C) as long as the balls are arranged in the lower passage 331b. Furthermore, after the first ball falls downward from the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18C), the light path is directed to the second ball (right ball in FIG. 18C). E3 is blocked. Moreover, when the second ball falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, if the next ball (the third ball) enters the lower passage 331b, the light path to the ball E3 is blocked. In this way, the ball continues to shield the light path E3, and it is always viewed as dark while the ball is flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the number of balls entering the specified winning opening 65a does not necessarily match the number of times the light is recognized to be brightly recognized or darkly recognized, and the number of balls entering the specific winning opening 65a Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the above-described superiority.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the front inclined side 332a1f is formed to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, so the light irradiated from the pair of left and right light irradiators 331c1 is the front inclined side 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is condensed to the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1, and reaches the light emission range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is disposed on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side 332a1f is viewed through the front plate member 320 This may make it difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light emitting unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting element that can be used for the light emitting unit 331c1 is limited.

  On the other hand, since the front inclined side 332a1 f condenses the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 331c1 to the center of the front plate member 320, the light irradiated from the pair of light irradiation parts 331c1 is overlapped, It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is possible to improve the selection freedom of the light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation part 331c1 (it becomes possible to select a light emitting element with low light intensity).

  In addition, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiators 331c1 is partially overlapped in the front view and viewed (see FIG. 17B). A total of three color lights of the color of the light emitted from the portion 331c1 and the color obtained by combining them can be viewed in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation parts 331c1 is individually shielded by the ball rolling along the path C2a (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the ball shields the light, It is possible to switch the color of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 variously.

  For example, in FIG. 18, it is assumed that the light irradiation part 331c1 on the right side irradiates light of "blue" color and the light irradiation part 331c1 on the left side irradiates light of "red" color. In this case, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping part)”, and “red” from the right to the light emission range E0 (see FIG. 17B). Is visible.

  In this case, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation part 331c1, the light of “blue” color is shielded, so the light projection range E0 Only red light is visible on

  On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation part 331c1, the light of “red” color is shielded, so the light projection range E0 Only light of "blue" color is visible.

  As described above, it is possible to change the aspect of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 depending on which route the ball rolls and which light irradiation part 331c1 is shielded. Since the change in the aspect of the light is caused by a ball flowing down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the aspect of the light can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change of the aspect of the light irradiated from the light irradiator 331 c 1 is generated by the electronic control, it is possible to perform the rendering richer in randomness, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the front inclined side 332 a 1 f is formed in a V shape in top view, but may be formed in a parabolic shape in top view from the viewpoint of condensing light.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a back perspective view of combined operation unit 400. 19 and 20, a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and the drive motor 462 and the fixing plate 461 are not illustrated. In the combined operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

  FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a back exploded perspective view of combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the compound operation unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 slidably movable in the vertical direction, and one end can be guided to both left and right end portions of the main body member 410. A shield member 420 which is a pair of members connected together and whose other ends are pivotally supported with each other, a swing member 430 swingably disposed on the center front side of the main body member 410, and A leg member 440 having a pair fixedly fixed at both ends and extending in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 formed with a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440, and a driving force necessary for moving the leg member 440 A drive device 460 to be generated, a rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, a connection between the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410, and a wiring is accommodated inside Composed mainly comprises a guide arm 480, a.

  FIG. 23 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420 and the oscillating member 430, and FIG. 24 is a rear exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420 and the oscillating member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 is formed in a plate-like base member 411 which is elongated in the left-right direction, and is drilled in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends of the base member 411. Longitudinal leg insertion hole 412 which is extended, and a direction which is disposed on the inner side in the left-right direction with respect to the leg insertion hole 412 of the base member 411 and which is bored in the front-rear direction. And a cylindrical member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. The arm shaft support portion 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center in the left-right direction of the base member 411 and having a bowl-shaped tip, and a swing member 430 disposed at the lower end portion of the base member 411. The shaft support hole 431a A supporting portion 416 for supporting, a photo sensor 417 disposed on the front of the base member 411 and detecting the sensor passing portion 435 d of the swing member 430, and a decorative plate 418 formed in a substantially semicircular shape in front view; Mainly to

  The base member 411 has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction hangs down below the left and right end portions. Thus, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be disposed in the space (see FIG. 29).

  The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in a long hole shape, and insertion of the connection fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440 suppresses axial rotation of the leg member 440 with respect to the base member 411. Ru. Thereby, the posture of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 413 is an elongated hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and slid and is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. A front lid 413 a is disposed on the upper side of the guide hole 413 and covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and the side facing the guide hole 413 is formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413 b which is a plate-like portion protruding on the front side of the base member 411 and which inclines upward along the guide hole 413 is disposed.

  The front end of the support plate 413 b is in contact with the rear surface of the swing base member 421. Thereby, since the front and back rocking of the rocking base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, the posture during movement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  The arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed on the left side in a front view than the central portion of the base member 411, and more specifically, disposed at an intermediate portion between a portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to hang and a central portion in the lateral direction. Be done. The end (lower end) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported by the arm pivot portion 414, and a collar member is attached to the tip of the arm pivot portion 414. Fastened and fixed.

  The holding portion 415 is a portion hooked on a slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the hooked portion of the holding portion 415 abut The downward movement of the body member 410 is restricted. In addition, the inclined surface 415a is formed in the upper surface of the front-end | tip part formed in a bowl shape. The inclined surface 415a does not disturb the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position in a state where the slide lever 473 is in a state of being extended.

  The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion visually recognized in a front view together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, and in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29) is a portion to be in contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

  The shielding member 420 is a swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that the ends of a pair of plate members are axially supported, and a decoration member whose upper end is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421 422, a pair of connecting members 423 pivotably pivotally supported at one end coaxially with the pivotal support position of the pivoting base member 421, and a guide the other end of the linking member 423 is pivotally supported A guide plate 424 mainly formed with the hole 424 b and fastened and fixed to the front upper end of the rear case 210.

  The swing base member 421 is formed of a pair of plate-like members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape, and a swing shaft supported coaxially with a shaft support hole 423d formed at one end of the connection member 423. Mainly provided with a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft parts 421c inserted and guided through the guide holes 413 of the main body member 410, and an abutment plate 421d which is provided on the back side to abut the upper surface of the main body member 410. .

  The pivoting shaft hole 421b is a portion where the pivoting rod 423c inserted through one end of the connecting member 423 is penetrated and suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 and is a pivoting shaft of the pair of plate members 421a. It is.

  The insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, so the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward as the main body member 410 is moved lower than the intermediate position (see FIG. 30). It is moved close to the center in the left-right direction.

  The contact plate 421 d is a curved surface protruding from the plate member 421 a on the back side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d abut on each other at the retracted position.

  The decorative member 422 is a portion formed on the front side of the swing base member 421 at the front side of the swing base member 421 and a portion formed lower than the swing base member 421 in a front view, and its lower end is And a hanging portion 422b which is formed to be curved rearward with respect to the swing base member 421.

  The hanging portion 422 b is disposed closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

  The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a bent in a front view shape at a bending portion 423b, includes a pivot support rod 423c, and at one end of the rod member 423a, the pivot support rod 423c A shaft support hole 423d is inserted through which the shaft is inserted, and a slide shaft 423e is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a so as to be inserted into and guided by the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424.

  The bending portion 423b is bent above a straight line connecting the pivot support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bending portion 423b is disposed apart from the swing base member 421 more than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connection member 423, and the design freedom of the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted into the guide hole 424b and a disc-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

  The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and a guide hole 424b which is a pair of elongated holes drilled in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends of the base plate 424a and extended in the left-right direction. , Mainly. The guide holes 424 b are formed in pairs at the same height.

  The guide hole 424 b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211 a of the back case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 to guide the connecting member 423 can be reduced. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be disposed at a position further away from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed larger accordingly.

  The swinging member 430 is a member pivotably supported by the shaft support portion 416 so as to be pivotable, and a base member projecting to the front side of the central portion of the main body member 431 and the base member 411 which is swingingly operated. Member 432, a drive motor 433 for generating a driving force for driving the main body member 431 by being fastened and fixed to the base member 432, a drive gear 434 pivotally supported by the drive motor 433 and meshed with the drive gear 434 And a transmission member 435 pivotally supported on the drive gear 434 above the base member 432, and a coupling member 436 coupling the coupling shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the coupling shaft 431b of the main body member 431. Prepare for

  The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and is bored in the left and right direction below both ends in the back side left and right direction. And a connecting shaft 431b, which is disposed at a central portion on the side, and one end of the connecting member 436 is pivotally supported.

  The connection shaft 431b is disposed closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a on the rear surface side of the main body member 431. Thereby, the moving width of the upper end of the main body member 431 can be made larger than the moving width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

  The transmission gear 435 is supported on the base member 432 and extends on the opposite side of the main body 435a formed on the main body 435a, and a main body 435a on which a gear engaged with the drive gear 434 is formed over approximately a half circumference. Formed along the left side of the front surface of the overhanging portion 435b, a columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting rightwardly in a front view from the overhanging tip end portion of the overhanging portion 435b, and the overhanging portion 435b And a sensor passing portion 435d (see FIG. 34) which is fan-shaped in a left-right direction and whose peripheral portion passes the photo sensor 417.

  The connection member 436 is a rod-like member in which holes parallel to each other are formed at both ends, and one side connection hole 436a formed at one end and pivotally supported by the connection shaft 431b of the main body member 431 And the other side connection hole 436b which is bored at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435.

  Referring back to FIG. 21 and FIG. The arm member 440 has a long plate-like main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction, and a cross section projecting from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side is formed in an elongated hole shape long in the vertical direction Connection fixing portion 442, a pair of insertion shaft portions 443 protruding from the upper and lower end portions of the main body portion 441 to the back side and inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and the front side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 441 A locking portion 444 protruding to the other end of the biasing spring 445 and the other end of the biasing spring 445 locked to the locking portion 444 while the other end is locked And a holding fixing portion 446 fastened and fixed to the front side.

  A rack gear 441a is engraved on the side surface of the main body 441 opposite to the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is engaged with the drive gear 463 of the drive unit 460, whereby the drive generated by the drive unit 460 is generated. Force is transmitted to the leg members 440.

  The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape, and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extended in the vertical direction, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can. Furthermore, since the insertion shaft 443 is formed as a pair of upper and lower, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

  The biasing spring 445 generates a biasing force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the biasing spring 445 functions as a fixed side end locked to the holding fixing portion 446, and one end functions as a moving side end locked to the locking portion 444.

  The guide member 450 is a main body member 451 which is a vertically long plate member arranged in a pair of left and right, and a long hole shape which is bored in the front and rear direction in the main body member 451 in a longitudinal direction Guide member 452, a pair of fixing parts 453 for fixing the driving device 460 at the vertical center of the main body member 451, and a front end of the upper end part of the main body member 451. A cover member 454 disposed on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being arranged in FIG.

  The drive unit 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step backward and the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixed portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212 b of the back case 210 ( 6), a drive motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 461, and a drive gear 463 pivotally supported by the drive motor 462.

  The fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side separating from the main body member 410 is raised one step to the front side, so that a gap surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixing plate 461 may be formed on the side separating from the main body member 410 it can. Here, when the biasing spring 445 is disposed on the left and right of the leg member 440, the disposition width of the leg member 440 including the biasing spring 4454 increases in the left-right direction, whereby the lateral width of the opening 211a decreases. It was In the present embodiment, the biasing spring 445 can be disposed in a gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixing plate 461. It is possible to suppress the space of the direction.

  The rear upper plate 470 is a member fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211 a of the rear case 210, and includes a plate-like main portion 471 and its main portion 471. A columnar shaft support portion 472 protruding from the upper left end in front view to the front side, a slide lever 473 elongated in the left-right direction disposed at the center of the main body 471, and the slide lever 473 in the left-right direction And a front cover 475 fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to be placed on the front side of the slide lever 473.

  The shaft support portion 472 is a portion on which the one side cylindrical portion 481 b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip. A wire introduced to the main body member 410 is disposed through the vicinity of the pivot portion 472.

  The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 and prevents the main body member 410 from moving downward when the main body member 410 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 29). is there. An inclined surface 473 a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. The contact between the inclined surface 473 a and the inclined surface 415 a of the main body member 410 makes it possible to suppress the resistance generated on the contact surface.

  The sliding lever 473 changes the overhanging distance depending on whether or not the solenoid 474 conducts electricity. For example, when the slide lever 473 is extended leftward in the front view by the conduction of electricity, the slide lever 473 is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 if the electricity is in a conductive state, and the main body member 410 Downward movement is prevented (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not in contact with each other, and the main body member 410 is allowed to move downward.

  Here, it is also conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven as the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position, and the slide lever 473 abuts on the holding portion 415. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 can not be released until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473 after the main body member 410 is placed at the retracted position. Therefore, when the arrangement of the main body member 410 is detected to change the operation of the drive device 460, it is necessary to control the drive device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is disposed to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward with the slide lever 473 extended (FIG. 31). Refer to), it abuts in due course, and the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 is extended again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever The top surface of 473 is abutted (see FIG. 29). Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in the extended state, it is possible to prevent the downward movement of the main body member 410 after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, control of the drive device 460 is facilitated.

  The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a, which is a recessed groove for guiding the slide lever 473, is formed on the rear surface along the left-right direction. The slide groove 475a of the front cover 475 slides the slide lever 473 The positional deviation in the vertical direction during movement is suppressed.

  The wire guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion formed of a resin material and guiding the wire W from the rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 to the main body member 410. The first guide arm 481 having the one side tubular portion 481 b formed thereon is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 472 and the second guide arm 482 having the other end of the first guide arm 481 pivotally supported at one end. And a third guide arm 483 having the other end thereof pivotally supported at one end thereof and the other end pivotally supported by the arm support portion 414.

  Here, the wiring W is an electrical wiring (for example, a flat harness) which is formed in a band shape (formed wide in the vertical direction in FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C than that of the first guide arm 481 and the length of the third guide arm 483 is longer than that of the second guide arm 481. Is formed shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

  The wire guide arm 480 is configured to be able to accommodate the wire W therein, and is a member that prevents the wire W from breaking and breaking. Thus, the wires W introduced to the main body member 410 do not have to be disposed through the leg members 440, and the space for disposing the leg members 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be expanded in the left-right direction.

  Next, the first guiding arm 481 and the second guiding arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. The third guiding arm 483 includes the one described in the first guiding arm 481 and the second guiding arm 482 as a technical idea, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  25 (a) is a front view of the first guiding arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guiding arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 481 in -XXVc line | wire, FIG.25 (d) is a sectional view of the 1st guide arm 481 in the XXVd-XXVd line of FIG. 25 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 has a plate-like arm 481a formed in a long plate shape and a left end in front elevation of the plate-like arm 481a. One side cylindrical portion 481b having an axis disposed on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (the side surface on the lower side in FIG. 25A) of the plate-like arm 481a Among the end portions of 481a, at the end opposite to the one side cylindrical portion 481b, the axis is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-like arm portion 481a, and the other side cylindrical portion extends in the longitudinal direction 481c, an overhang portion 481d formed in a plate shape with a predetermined interval above the plate-like arm portion 481a, a bottom portion 481e connecting the back sides of the plate-like arm portion 481a and the overhang portion 481d, and the overhang portion 481d Front locking portion 481 extending from the front side to the plate-like arm 481 a And, mainly includes the.

  The wire W is inserted through the inside of a concave cross section formed by the plate-like arm 481a, the overhang 481d, and the bottom 481e (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the wiring W can be prevented from being rubbed with another member or pinched by another member.

  In the plate-like arm 481a, a notch 481a1 is formed in a portion opposite to the front locking portion 481f, and the plate thickness of the plate-like arm 481a is reduced in the portion where the notch 481a1 is formed. .

  The notch portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-like arm portion 481a in a shape slightly larger than the front engagement portion 481f in a front view, and is formed across the width direction of the plate-like arm portion 481a. In the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted (the bottom portion 481e is formed to penetrate).

  By configuring the notch 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (in one-way die cutting). In addition, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guiding arm 481 by inserting the wiring W from the notch portion 481a1.

  Of the plate-like arm portion 481a, in the portion other than the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed, the distance from the overhang portion 481d is shorter than the overhanging width of the front engagement portion 481f. Therefore, in the state where the wire W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wire W drops off on the front side (the near side of FIG. 27A). It can be prevented.

  The plate-like arm portion 481a includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the overhanging portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other side cylindrical portion 481 c pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and a rib protruding from the second guide arm 482 in the middle portion of the plate-like arm portion 481 a It is formed alternately with the part N.

  The other cylindrical portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially enlarged, and the end surface on the rear side is closer to the front than the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlapping margin with the second guide arm. It forms (refer FIG.25 (b)).

  The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed on the inner peripheral side of the other side cylindrical portion 481c over the half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25A), and the other side from the other side bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side cylindrical portion 481c It is a hollow formed up to approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side cylindrical portion 481c (see FIG. 25 (c)).

  The overhanging portion 481d is provided with an arc-shaped overhanging portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other side tubular portion 481c around the other side tubular portion 481c, and is extended to the front side than the plate-like arm portion 481a . Thus, even in the case where the planar locking portion 481 f is formed, it is possible to secure a gap for inserting the wiring from the front side.

  The overhanging portion 481 d includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the plate-like arm portion 481 a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N protruding from the plate-like arm portion 481 a in the middle portion of the overhang portion 481 d.

  The arc-shaped overhanging portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc shape formed when the wire W is bent to the outside of the other side cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B). Ru.

  In addition, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the inner upper end portion of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached by a route not blocked by the rear case 210. Need to remove. In the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 481 d close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed to project to the front side relative to the plate-like arm 481 a that is separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wire W, the wire W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the overhang portion 481d to the plate-like arm portion 481a, so the upper wall surface of the back case 210 interferes with the work. It will never be. When wiring is inserted, it may be inserted in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacement of the wiring W can be improved.

  The bottom portion 481e is disposed above the one-side tubular portion 481b and is formed in a fan-like shape around the axis of the one-side tubular portion, and is disposed above the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom portion 481e2 is formed mainly in a fan shape centered on an axis spaced upward from the axis of the side cylindrical portion 481c by a predetermined distance. In addition, the end of the arc-shaped overhanging portion 481d1 is formed on the left in front view than the end of the other-side bottom portion 481e2.

  The planar locking portion 481 f is a claw-like member that prevents the wire W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed to have a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

  Fig.26 (a) is a front view of the 2nd guide arm 482, FIG.26 (b) is a bottom view of the 2nd guide arm 482, FIG.26 (c) is XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guiding arm 482 along line XXVIc, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guiding arm 482 along line XXVId-XXVId of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the second guiding arm 482 has a plurality of technical idea configurations similar to the first guiding arm 481, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. Do. That is, the plate-like arm portion 481a is the plate-like arm portion 482a, the other side tubular portion 481c is the other side tubular portion 482c, the overhanging portion 481d is the overhanging portion 482d, and the bottom portion 481e is the bottom engaging portion 482e 481 f correspond to the front locking portions 482 f, respectively.

  The plate-like arm portion 482a includes a notch portion 482a2 in a portion opposed to the front surface locking portion 482f. The technical idea of the notched portion 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notched portion 481a1, so the description will be omitted.

  The plate-like arm portion 482 a and the overhang portion 482 d have rib portions N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one side shaft support portion 482b pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, the rib portion N is formed in the overhang portion 482d, and in the middle portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-like arm portion 482a. And it is alternately formed in the overhang part 482d.

  The second guide arm 482 is cylindrically protruded on the front side from the upper right portion of the bottom portion 482e and has a first side support portion 482b formed with a fastening portion at its tip, and the one side support portion 482b as a shaft One side bottom portion 482e1 formed in a substantially arc shape and extending from the bottom portion 482e on the same plane, and the right end portion of the plate-like arm portion 482a protruding from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 And an arc-shaped plate portion 482a1 connected thereto.

  The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than that of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wire W is bent to the outside of the other side cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B). Ru.

  The one side shaft support portion 482b is a portion where the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other side cylindrical portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 is the other side cylinder It is formed to be able to abut on the back side surface of the protuberance 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottoms 481 e and 482 e are formed on the same plane, and the bottoms 481 e and 482 e can contact each other in the rotational directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 It is formed. Therefore, excessive rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and excessive bending of the wire W can be prevented (see FIG. 27).

  The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one side shaft support portion 482b over the half circumference (the lower half circumference in FIG. 26A) and one side shaft from the one side bottom portion 482e1 side of the one side shaft support portion 482b. It is a recess formed up to approximately half the length of the support portion 482b (see FIG. 26C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, swinging of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 29), and FIG. A state (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33) in which the second guide arm 482 is swung counterclockwise from the front view to the end of the movable range where the second guide arm 482 can swing relative to the first guide arm 481 from the state a) is It is illustrated. In FIG. 27 (b), the one side bottom portion 482 e 1 of the second guide arm 482 abuts on the other side bottom portion 48 1 e 2 of the first guide arm 48 1 prevents further swing of the second guide arm 482. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the wiring W is a recessed portion formed by the plate-like arm portions 481a and 482a, the overhang portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e (FIG. 25D and FIG. ))). Therefore, the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482 can prevent the wire W from being bent so as to be disconnected during the movement of the main body member 410.

  Further, at the pivotally supported position (right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wire W is disposed so as to wrap around the other side cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, at the pivotally supported position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, it is suppressed that the wire W is bent with a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, the wire W can be prevented from being bent, and disconnection of the wire W can be suppressed.

  The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 29, that is, the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. When the speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position is high, it is easy to improve the rendering effect. When the main body member 410 is started from the stopped state at the retracted position, it is necessary to cause the drive device 460 to generate a driving force which exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance at the pivotally supported position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 that constitute the wiring guide arm 480 be smaller.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the circumference of the one side cylindrical portion 481b are The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is enclosed. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in the direction away from the mating member that forms the pivotal support relationship, and have the effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. In a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one side cylindrical portion 481b (over the entire circumference) Therefore, the resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27 (b), the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one side cylindrical portion 481b is approximately half circumference (FIG. 27 (b) upper half circumference ). As shown in FIG. 27B, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap in a large part. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state shown in FIG.

  The length at which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap so that the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481 from the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 As a result, the rotational resistances of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increase. That is, as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be reduced.

  Therefore, the speed at which the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 abut can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 contact the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1. The load received can be suppressed by contacting. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are opposite to each other by force (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). From the state of (b), it is possible to prevent the side from being further rotated counterclockwise).

  In the present embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by pivotally supporting three members, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be changed even when the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

  For example, in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one direction, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (the posture Changeable) is changeable. Therefore, even during movement of the main body member 410, the movement speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by the change in the posture of the third guide arm 483. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is unnecessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the other-side bottom portion 481e2 and the one-side bottom portion 482e1 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped overhang portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Even if the wire W is bent to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) due to this gap, the wire W is pinched between the arc shaped overhang portion 481d1 and the arc shaped plate portion 482a1. Can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wire guide arm 480 is in the open state, the wire W moves largely to the outside of the other side cylindrical portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W is likely to be displaced in the vicinity of the end (axially supported position) of the arm 482. Repeating the positional deviation of the wire W with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wire W and the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 rub against each other, and the durability of the wire W There is a risk that the sex may decline.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib W formed in a rib shape on the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is hooked to the wire W, whereby the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and The resistance with the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and positional deviation of the wire W can be suppressed.

  By forming a rib N on the side opposite to the direction in which the wire W separates from the other cylindrical portion 481 c near the pivotally supported position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wire W is effective. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W extending from the connection position of the arc-shaped overhang 481d1 and the attachment 481d toward the extension 481d is pressed against the plate-like arm 481a along the shape of the arc-shaped extension 481d1 . Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be increased.

  The side surface of the portion near the pivotal position of the plate-like arm portion 481a to which the wire W described above is pressed is curved and recessed on the opposite side of the overhang portion 481d, thereby fitting the wire W into the recess. The positional deviation between W and the plate-like arm 481a can be suppressed. In this case, since the surface of the curved recess and the wiring W are in surface contact with each other, the local wear of the wiring W is suppressed as compared with the wiring W receiving resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can.

  In addition, in the vicinity of the pivotally supported position, the distance between the plate-like arm portion 481a and the overhang portion 481d may be increased. For example, the additional portion 481d may be inclined in a manner of separating from the plate-like arm 481a as it approaches the other side cylindrical portion 481c from the front surface locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. 27B. In this case, the wire W is curved by a portion (a portion near the other-side cylindrical portion 481c) in which the distance between the overhang portion 481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a is increased, thereby causing the wire W to sag in the vicinity of the support portion. It is possible to absorb and suppress positional deviation of the wiring W at the middle portion of the first guide arm 481 (portion sandwiched by the front locking portion 481f) (the wiring W offsets the slack in the vicinity of the support portion) To prevent the positional deviation of the first guide arm 481 in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, the wire W can be prevented from being rubbed and worn with the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481, and the durability of the wire W can be improved.

  The rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side facing each other at an intermediate portion of the first guiding arm 481 and the second guiding arm 482. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily hooked to more rib portions N as compared with the case where the rib portions N are formed on only one of the opposed inner surfaces. Thereby, the resistance between the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be raised, and the positional deviation between the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

  In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped collar member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The collar member C is fastened and fixed to, for example, the tip of the one side shaft support portion 482b or the tip of the shaft support portion 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted into the one side cylindrical portion 481b. The front surface of each of the cylindrical portions 481b and 481c It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

  In the present embodiment, the collar member C is extended to a position where at least a part of the collar members C overlaps the adjacent overhang portions 481 d and 482 d in a front view, or the collar member C and the overhang portions 481 d, The wiring W is extended from the position at 482 d to a position where it does not drop off. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27B, a gap is generated between the collar member C and the overhanging portion 481d, but the portion where the wiring W separates from the one side cylindrical portion 481b (expansion outward) Because the wiring W does not fall out of the gap, the possibility of falling off is small. That is, the collar member C is extended until it overlaps with the wiring W in a front view (FIG. 27), so that the collar member C has a diameter sufficient to prevent the wiring W from falling off. This prevents the wire W from falling off the wire guide arm 480.

  Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C abuts when the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded. It can not be folded. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lengths in the longitudinal direction of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are different. That is, in a state in which the extending directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are disposed on the front side of the one side tubular portion 481b. The difference is such that the provided collar member C and the collar member C provided on the front side of the other side cylindrical portion 482c do not interfere with each other.

  As a result, by arranging the collar member C, it is possible to suppress the arrangement space by folding the wiring guide arm 480 while suppressing the wire W from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480. The longitudinal length (length to the axis of the collar member C) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is preferably different from the diameter of the collar member C or more.

  Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, changes in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described.

  28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 31 is a combined operation unit 400. 32 is a front view of combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a back view of combined operation unit 400.

  In FIGS. 28 and 29, the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and in FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state of FIGS. With the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b with the main body member 410 being disposed, the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed is shown in FIGS. The state where the member 410 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  Also, in FIG. 28, the body member 431 of the swing member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the body member 410 is illustrated by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is an imaginary line. In FIGS. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is shown in phantom.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is enlarged, and in the enlarged view, the state where the connecting member 423 has moved by a predetermined amount from the end portion on the center side of the pair of guide holes 424b is illustrated by an imaginary line. Be done. Further, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is enlarged, and in the enlarged view, a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c is moved by a predetermined amount from the lower end of the guide hole 413 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As the drive gear 463 is rotated, the body member 410 is vertically moved along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 engaged with the drive gear 463 moves.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. The center portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 is disposed at the end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the lateral direction outside, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wire guide arms 480 are folded in a posture in which the extending directions of the guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 are in contact with each other, whereby the downward movement of the main body member 410 is prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of a mechanical portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 is a gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 It arrange | positions in the clearance gap which becomes wide as it goes (refer FIG.28 and FIG.34). Thus, in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be vertically packed in the shielding member 420, and the vertical width of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 can be increased. It can be suppressed. In this case, the area in a front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swing member 430 can be reduced, and accordingly, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be further enlarged.

  Here, for example, a mechanical portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 may be disposed on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to widen the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (to move the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 in the moving direction of the main body member 410), It is possible to arrange in the front side of. On the other hand, in this case, since it becomes necessary to move the swing member 430 housing the decoration member 422 to the front side (the direction away from the main body member 410), the space on the front side of the swing member 430 is suppressed. It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swing member 430 (a mechanical portion such as the transmission gear 435) is accommodated in the space between the pair of decorative members 422 caused by being separated from each other. it can. As a result, for example, it becomes unnecessary to move the decorative member 422 to the front side of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 in order to widen the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422. 430 can be positioned proximate to body member 410. Thereby, the swing member 430 can be formed three-dimensionally on the front side.

  In FIG. 28, since the swing member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 is tilted (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in a front view is suppressed as compared with the posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35) in an upright position. Ru. Therefore, even when viewed as the swinging member 430 alone, the area in a front view formed by the swinging member 430 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. Thus, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 is in the same posture as in FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 is disposed at the end in the left and right direction of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Will be placed. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the third guide arm 483 is mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 take an inclined posture with respect to the left and right direction.

  Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the state in which the third guide arm 483 is stably mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410 is referred to as the main body member It can be maintained longer while moving 410. Thus, the wires W disposed inside the wire guide arm 480 can be made more stable, and disconnection of the wires W can be prevented.

  Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at high speed and disposed at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 rebounds at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420 The pivotally supported position of the member 421 and the connecting member 423 (axial support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) may bounce upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may not be stable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes inward in the left-right direction, and the guide in which the slide shaft portion 423e is guided The holes 424 b are formed in the left-right direction.

  In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c is a directional component perpendicular to the rebounding direction of the pivotal support position of the swing base member 421 and the connection member 423. Movably guided in a direction having

  Therefore, a resistance F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft 421c moved upward with the upward movement of the swing base member 421, and the upper part of the insertion shaft 421c Movement is suppressed. In this case, the swinging base member 421 is prevented from jumping upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 is prevented from being bounced at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 jumps upward and the connection member 423 jumps upward, the slide shaft portion 423 e is abutted on the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424 b, thereby suppressing the movement of the connection member. Be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bending portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423 and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the bending portion 423b is the swing base member 421 Move in the direction away from the upper surface (the bending portion 213b moves the distance X to the center in the left-right direction). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 bounces back at the end in the left and right direction of the guide hole 424b, a sufficient distance can be formed between the connection member 423 and the swing base member 421. A collision with the swing base member 421 can be prevented. Thereby, the design freedom of the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  In the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the connection member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to be moved to the left in front view due to a disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the guide hole 424b on the right in front view is the center of the pair of guide holes 424b in the left-right direction. The movement is blocked at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connection member 423. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 is disposed at the end in the left and right direction of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Will be placed. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, a posture in which the other side bottom 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 (see FIG. 25) and one side bottom 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 abut in the swing direction. Take

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, along with the movement, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421 c move upward along the guide holes 413 in opposite directions in the left-right direction. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swinging base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are directed in opposite directions to the left and right, respectively, and offset each other. Therefore, since it is suppressed that the rocking shaft holes 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axes of the pair of rocking base members 421 shift in the lateral direction, the shielding member 420 shifts in the lateral direction. Being suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the extended position, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decoration members 422 of the shielding member 420 abut each other. Thereby, for example, even if one swinging base member 421 moves faster than the other swinging base member 421 and the pair of swinging base members 421 causes positional deviation (misalignment in the vertical direction), the other The positional deviation can be suppressed by the contact with the swing base member 421. Thereby, the posture at the extended position of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  The change of the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in a front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position to the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, the shielding member 420 is moved to the upper side of the main body member 410 particularly in the central portion in the left-right direction when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position. Is reduced. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be separately viewed.

  Thus, the area of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in a front view is greater when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position than when the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In particular, the width in the vertical direction at the center in the horizontal direction is enlarged. In this case, the area change in a front view of the area formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be enlarged in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that easily attracts the player's attention. The effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the change in the area of the overlapping portion P described above occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to extend to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to perform rendering in a mode in which the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the operation of the swinging member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 400 along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 400 along line XXXV-XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 34, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted is illustrated by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422 b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 and the main body member 410 of the swing member 430. The illustrated state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 35, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is erected is illustrated by a solid line, and a state in which the swing member 430 is tilted is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference and disposed in an extended state. The moving member 540 of the rocking movement unit 500 is illustrated in phantom.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connection is made. As the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the connecting member 436 swings about the pivotal support portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in the direction toward and away from the decoration member 422 b. The swing member 430 can switch between the inclined state shown in FIG. 34 and the upright state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and can change its posture as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

  The shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swing member 430, so when the swing member 430 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side is disposed opposite to the shielding member 420. It is possible to secure a large distance D between the and the main body member 410. In addition, on the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 opposite to the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swinging member 430 is compared with the case where the swinging member 430 slides forward and backward. Space required to arrange the

  In other words, when the space for housing the shielding member 420 is secured by sliding movement in the front and rear direction, the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 opposite to the shielding member 420 also moves by the distance D similarly to the upper end portion. That is, the arrangement space of the swing member 430 is increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 can be smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430, and the arrangement region of the swing member 430 can be It can be compatible with suppressing.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, while the swing member 430 tilts, the variation width d of the outer shape of the front lower portion of the main body member 431 is small. Therefore, even when the main body member 431 is tilted in a state in which another member approaches or abuts on the lower side of the main body member 431, it is possible to suppress application of load between the members.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) disposed opposite to the main body member 431 forms a curved surface convex downward, and the main body member 431 approaches this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap in a front view). Thereby, the posture of the main body member 431 can be changed with a large width at the upper portion of the main body member 431 while securing the effect of bringing the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 into close proximity at the lower portion of the main body member 431 and making them integrally visible. it can.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 inclines toward the back surface (the side of the main body member 410) as it goes downward (closer to the pivot portion 416 (see FIG. 23)). And curved in a direction away from the swing member 430. In this case, the distance between the decoration member 422 and the swing member 430 can be secured when the decoration member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the decoration member 422 and the neck A collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

  In addition, the lower end of the decorative member 422 can be stored to the deep (downward) of the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 while the upper end of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. . Since no other member is disposed on the front side of the swing member 430, the design freedom of the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

  As illustrated in FIG. 35, in the state where the swing member 430 is erected, the decoration member 422 is separated upward from between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the body member 431 of the swing member 430 is The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are disposed close to each other. Thereby, the dead space in the case where the decoration member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 can be filled. Further, by making it possible to form a posture in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is disposed close to the main body member 410, the moving width of the swinging member 430 in the front and back direction in the pachinko machine 10 whose front and rear width is defined is large. Therefore, the effect of the swinging motion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

  Here, in FIG. 34, the swinging member 430 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81, and a state in which the swinging member 430 is tilted is illustrated. In this case, the direction A1 of the rendering surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is inclined downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swing member 430 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and a state in which the swing member 430 is erected is illustrated by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the rendering surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swinging of the swinging member 430, the direction A1, A2 on the front side of the swinging member 430 is directed to the eyes of the player (the front side at the center of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted. Therefore, the attention power of the swing member 430 can be improved, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  Further, in order to improve the attentional force of the swinging member 430, the rotational shaft is not newly provided, and the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is utilized. That is, the pivoting portion 416 has the purpose of securing the distance between the decoration member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decoration member 422 begins to be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410. It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the directions A1 and A2 on the front side of the member 430 to the direction toward the eyes of the player (the front side at the center of the third symbol display device 81).

  The degree of swinging of the swinging member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passing portion 435 d passes the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passing portion 435d does not pass through the photosensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passing portion 435 passes the photo sensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gap between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 is secured in a state in which the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass the photo sensor 417.

  Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 upward while the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass the photo sensor 417, the shielding member 420 and the main body member 410 do not interfere with each other. It can be housed between the swing member 430 and the like.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, it will be described that the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses the malfunction of the operation of the combined operation unit 400. 36 is a front view of combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 400 taken along line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. In FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted from the upright state (see FIG. 35) by a predetermined angle and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b. .

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down with the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 in the middle of the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the tilting state (see FIG. 34). Control may be performed. This control is performed, for example, when changing the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35 immediately.

  Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) for driving the main body member 410 after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 reaches the inclining state (see FIG. 35 broken line) from the standing state shown in FIG. Can not occur when the back side of the body member 431 abuts on the hanging portion 422b (see FIG. 34).

  However, in this case, after the operation of the swing member 430 is completed, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) for tilting the swing member 430 and the drive motor 462 for driving the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. The time to change to the state is extended In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 simultaneously. In this case, the main body member 410 is vertically moved while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 reaches the inclined state (see FIG. 34) from the standing state (see FIG. 35). In this case, the main body 431 of the swing member 430 abuts on the hanging portion 422b, which may cause the combined operation unit 400 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the hanging portion 422b is formed to be curved (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the abutment of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a flat surface) of the main body member 431 is not an abutment by a surface but an abutment by a point (line) And the frictional resistance at the contact position can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 with the hanging portion 422b can suppress the combined operation unit 400 from malfunctioning.

  For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is in the middle of moving up the main body member 410 from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is If it is large, it will become a factor to which the moving speed of the main body member 410 is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, since the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is inclined in the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b as the main body member 410 moves upward, the falling portion 422b drives the main body member 431 of the swing member 430. There is a giving relationship. As a result, the load on the drive motor 433 to tilt the swing member 430 can be reduced.

  Also, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is in the middle of moving the main body member 410 downward from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b If the resistance is large, the movement speed of the main body member 410 may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. In addition, since the hanging portion 422b is formed to be inclined downward and inclined backward and the back side of the main body member 431 is formed in a planar shape, the falling portion moves even if the main body member 410 moves downward while contacting with each other. 422b and the body member 431 do not get caught on each other.

  From these, the composite operation unit 400 is prevented from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 tilts. Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 tilts, the state of the combined operation unit 400 can be changed instantly.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50, the rocking operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. In FIGS. 38 and 39, the movable member 540 is shown in the retracted position.

  Swing operation unit 500 is formed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since their technical configurations are common, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the operation on the left side of the pair of left and right operation units The unit will be described as the swing operation unit 500.

  FIG. 40 is a front exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 40, the fastening hole 527 is partially enlarged, and in FIG. 41, the bridging member 528 is partially enlarged.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 40 and 41, the swinging operation unit 500 has a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510, and pivoting holes 522 and 526 are formed at both ends, and one side pivoting hole 522 is formed in the base member 510. The distance between the central axes of the long plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 on which the shaft is pivotally supported and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520 , 526, and the one side axial support hole 532 at one end is pivotally supported by the base member 510 so as to be pivotally supported by the base member 510. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 pivotally supported by the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520 and the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530; Drive force to swing the The driving device 550, and the front plate member 560 disposed on the front side of the base member 510 with the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 interposed therebetween and to which the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Prepare.

  The base member 510 includes a plate-like main body portion 511, a plurality of axially supporting portions 512 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side from the right side in a front view of the main body portion 511, and the lowermost one of the axially supporting portions 512. A drive gear receiving hole 513 bored on the left of the three-shaft portion 512c in a front view, a photo sensor 514 disposed on the right of the shaft support 512, and a front side from a left side of the main portion 511 A lower support 515 is provided mainly in a shape that protrudes.

  The main body portion 511 is formed such that the height of the upper end portion is different between the left side in front view and the right side in front view of the first shaft portion 512a. That is, on the left side in a front view of the first shaft portion 512a, a step-down portion 511a whose upper side surface is lowered by one step is provided.

  The step-down portion 511a has an effect (see FIG. 8) of widening the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 is disposed at the overhanging position. Also, in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 may contact in the front-rear direction It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). Thus, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position toward the extended position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the extended position toward the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 and the main body 511 The area that may be scraped can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

  The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members which are disposed vertically separated from each other and whose axes are parallel to each other, and one end of the driven side arm member is supported in order from the top A shaft portion 512a, a second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and a third shaft portion 512c on which the transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported Prepare mainly.

  The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole into which a stepped portion protruding on the back side of the drive gear 552 is fitted.

  The lower support 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower surface of the other end of the drive arm 520 in a state where the drive arm 520 is disposed at the retracted position, and the other end of the drive arm 520 It is prevented that the part is swung further downward.

  The driving side arm member 520 is a member formed of a resin material, and is formed into a long plate shape, and one end portion of the main body plate portion 521 (an end portion on the right side in front view) ) And a semicircle centered on the one-side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522 and into which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted. And a sensor passage plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a which is raised from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and a side shaft support hole 522 The collar member 525 having a coaxially arranged through hole and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate portion 521, and drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end (the end on the left in front view) of the main body plate portion 521 The second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via a collar , And a pair of fastening holes 527 including a pair of fastening holes 527a1 and 527b1 disposed near the other end of the main body plate 521 and drilled in the front-rear direction, and the fastening holes thereof And 527 are mainly provided with a bridging member 528 in which the insertion portions 528a and 5528b2 are inserted and fastened and fixed to the mounting portion 527.

  The main body plate portion 521 includes, at one end (the right end in FIG. 40), a raised portion 521a which is inserted into the guide hole 563 and to which the sensor passing plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The gear portion 523 is a portion engaged with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the drive device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a provided on the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed to cover the entire gear teeth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily need to cover the entire gear teeth 523. The umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It becomes possible to abut on the 553b, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

  The sensor passing plate 524 is a member disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion which is bulked up and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. 524a and a sensor passing plate portion 524b radially extending from the fastening portion 524a around the one side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state.

  The sensor passing plate portion 524 b is a member that is disposed to face the side surface on the front side of the front plate member 560 and passes through the inside of the photo sensor 514. Here, the sensor passing plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passing plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560. A shaft tilt with respect to the two-shaft portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passing plate portion 524 b is a member that can detect that the driving side arm member 520 is placed in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photo sensor 514. That is, the sensor passing plate portion 524 b can be used both for the increase in the resistance to deformation (the shaft tilt) of the drive side arm member 520 and the detection of the posture of the drive side arm member 520.

  The collar member 525 is a plate-like member formed in a substantially diamond shape whose outer shape is rounded at a corner, and has a main portion 525a having a circular outer shape whose diameter in the end in the short direction of the outer shape An external fitting hole 525b drilled at the center of the portion 525a, and a pair of fastening portions 525c disposed on the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a and having tapered ends and being fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 521; Mainly to

  The pair of fastening holes 527 includes a first fastening hole 527a to which the first bridging member 528a is fixed, and a second fastening hole 527b to which the second bridging member 528b is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is disposed) of the drive side arm member 520, so the fastening holes 527 and one side shaft A long distance to the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as described later, even if there is a possibility that the driven side arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528 and torsional deformation may occur in the drive side arm member 520, the deformation is made into the fastening hole 527 and the one side support hole 522 And a long distance between them can be used (a twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the second shaft 512b from the one side shaft support hole 522 (load in the direction to fold the second shaft 512b) and improve the durability of the second shaft 512b. be able to.

  The first fastening hole 527a is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridging member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the first fastening hole 527a1, and the auxiliary projection 528a3 is inserted therethrough. And a first pinning hole 527a2 to which the first bridging member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

  The first fastening holes 527a1 and the first pinning holes 527a2 are disposed along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the short direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .

  The second fastening hole 527b is formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridging member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the second fastening hole 527b1, and the auxiliary projection 528b3 is inserted therethrough. And the base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. And.

  The second fastening holes 527b1 and the second pinning holes 527b2 are disposed along a line forming a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). . That is, when the second bridging member 528b is bent and deformed to the near side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the driving side arm member 520 is the twisting direction (the direction of rotation around the longitudinal direction of the driving side arm member 520) It can be divided in the bending direction (the direction in which the drive side arm member 520 bends to the front side). As a result, when the second bridging member 528 b receives a load from the driven arm member 530 and is bent and deformed, it is possible to suppress the torsional deformation of the driving side arm member 520 about the longitudinal direction.

  The bridging member 528 is disposed on the opposite side of the other-side pivoting portion 526 with the first bridging member 528a disposed on the side closer to the other-side pivoting portion 526 and the first bridging member 528a. And a second bridging member 528b formed in a large size (long and wide in the short direction) as compared to the first bridging member 528a.

  The first bridging member 528a has a body portion 528a1 formed in a long plate shape, an insertion portion 528a2 which is inserted into and fixed to the first fastening hole 527a1 and protrudes adjacent to the insertion portion 528a2 Auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and a rib 528a4 formed along the side edge close to the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body 581a1 and protruding toward the back, and the end of the rib 528a4 And an inclined portion 528a5 inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body portion 528a1 is formed to have a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary projection 528a3 is a portion inserted into the first pinning hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported by Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1 to suppress the contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50) It is formed in such a manner as to be easily in contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

  The second bridging member 528b is provided adjacent to the body portion 528b1 formed in a long plate shape, the insertion portion 528b2 which is inserted into the second fastening hole 527b1 and fastened and fixed, and is protruded adjacent to the insertion portion 528b2 Auxiliary protrusion 528b3, a rib 528b4 formed along the side edge close to the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body 581b1 and protruding toward the back, and the end of the rib 528b4 And an inclined portion 528b5 inclined with respect to the direction of protrusion.

  The main body portion 528b1 is formed to have such a length as to cover the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary projection 528b3 is a portion inserted into the second pinning hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported by Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, thereby suppressing contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50) It is formed in such a manner as to be easily in contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridging member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven side arm member 530 rather than the width of the portion fastened to the driving side arm member 520 of the main body portion 528b1 (see FIG. 41). It is formed narrower. Thereby, when the driven side arm member 530 abuts on the second bridging member 528b, it is possible to prevent the second bridging member 528b from being twisted around the longitudinal direction (a bending along the longitudinal direction). Can be easier).

  Therefore, when the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b abut on each other, the second bridging member 528b can be prevented from being torsionally deformed, and the mode of deformation can be limited. In this case, the arrangement position of the portion (second pinning hole 527b2) for preventing the second bridging member 528b from being turned over can be limited, so the configuration of the second bridging member 528b can be simplified. . That is, it is unnecessary to form the auxiliary projection 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the short direction of the second bridging member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

  The driven side arm member 530 is a member formed of a resin material, and is formed into a long plate shape, and one end of the main body plate 531 (the end of the right side in a front view) And the other end (the end on the left side of the front view) of the main body plate 531 is drilled in the front-rear direction. And a second side axial support hole 533 in which the first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via a collar.

  The side surface on the front side of the main body plate portion 531 is formed on the same plane as the side surface on the front side of the drive side arm member 520.

  The moving member 540 is formed from a block shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a main surface 541 having a convex upper surface and a convex surface, and the rear surface of the main surface 541 projects in a cylindrical shape on the right side. A pair of pivotally supporting portions 542 provided and an alignment portion 543 protruding from the right side surface of the main body 451 are mainly provided.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed thicker as it moves toward the side (right side in FIG. 42A) where the pair of moving members 540 abut, so the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 moves in the pair It is formed on the side where the member 540 abuts, and is formed at a position separated from the driven arm member 530 to the front side (see FIG. 42).

  The shaft support portion 542 is formed with the same inter-axial distance as the inter-axial distance between the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. The shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b are formed of a pair of shafts formed identically to each other, and mainly provided with a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

  The first shaft portion 542 a is a portion inserted into the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542 b is inserted into the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. Part of the

  Here, as described above, the inter-axial distance between the axial support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the axial distance between the axial support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 It will be the same. In addition, relative arrangement of the first shaft portion 512 a and the second shaft portion 512 b disposed on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542 a and the second shaft portion 542 b disposed on the moving member 540 The relationship (the direction and distance of the straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the movable member 540 is not changed during the swing of the drive side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

  The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship of the pair of moving members 540 when the moving members 540 are arranged at the extended position. A recess is formed in the moving member 540 on the right side in front view (see FIG. 8) so as to be able to receive the alignment portion 543 of the moving member 540 on the left side.

  The drive device 550 has a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the back side, a drive gear 552 pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one drive gear 552. A transmission gear 553 is mainly provided, in which the first gear portion 553a of the step is engaged and the second gear portion 553b of the second step is engaged with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

  The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two stages of gear teeth having different diameters are formed coaxially, and a first gear portion 553a formed of a large diameter gear disposed opposite to the base member 510, and its first A second gear portion 553b formed of a gear having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 553a disposed on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and a center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b And an axial support hole 553c pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

  The front plate member 560 has a body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed by the same arrangement as the arrangement of the pivot portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passing plate 524. And a guide hole 563 which is formed in an arc shape along the movement trajectory of

  The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equal to the diameter of each column of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. As a result, since the shaft support portion 512 can be supported at both ends, the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operations of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped long hole through which a raised portion 521a protruding from the drive side arm member 520 toward the sensor passing plate 524 is inserted, and is extended in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion A stopper wall 563a. Thus, even if the drive side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive side arm member 520 abuts on the guide hole 563 and the movement is restricted. The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

  The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the movable member 540 from swinging movement beyond the movable range when the movable member 540 is moved toward the extended position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves further to the right than the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall 563a abuts the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed. Ru. The stopper wall 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the rear side. Thereby, the contact area between one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall 563a can be increased, and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed at the time of contact. Can reduce the stress applied to the

  The end of the movable range of the rocking operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the rocking operation unit 500 in the direction of the arrow XXXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in the swinging of the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the extended position, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (when both are swung to the extended position), the oppositely disposed side faces (right side faces in FIG. 43) remain parallel. As they are brought close to each other, it is easy to fit the alignment portion 543 and combine the pair of moving members 540.

  The bridge member 528 is put on the side surface on the front side of the driven side arm member 530 in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Further, since the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the extended position. Thus, the swing of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (right side in FIG. 42) where the pair of moving members 540 abut in the left-right direction. The driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 are formed apart from each other in the direction.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the bridging member 528 fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended in such a manner as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening point of the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b will be described. Due to the difference in the fastening points, the ease of turning the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b from the driving side arm member 520 is different.

  Here, “to be turned up” means that the bridging member 528 receives a force from the driven arm member 530 upward in FIG. 44 and peels off from the driving arm member 520.

  44 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the first bridging member 528a taken along line XXXXIVa-XXXXIVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 44 (b) is a line XXXXIVb in FIG. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the second bridging member 528b along the line XXXXIVb.

  First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 for receiving the second bridging member 528b are different from the first fastening hole 527a. A pedestal 527b3 is formed. As a result, the second embedding width Wb1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 in the second fastening hole 527b1, is longer than the first embedding width Wa1 which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 in the first fastening hole 527a1. Be done. Therefore, the second bridging member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridging member 528a (the second bridging member 528b is less likely to be turned over than the first bridging member 528a).

  As a second difference, the first overhang width Wa2 which is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521 It is shorter than the second overhang width Wb2. Accordingly, the second bridging member 528b can suppress deformation near the fastening position as compared to the first bridging member 528a (the second bridging member 528b is the first bridging member 528a). Hard to compare by comparison).

  As a third difference, the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with reference to the first pinning hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44A), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is It is formed on the side close to the driven side arm member 530 with reference to the 2 pin fastening hole 527b2 (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  In this case, the driven arm member 530 is moved (flexible deformation, falling deformation) in a direction (upward in FIG. 44) approaching the bridging member 528, and fastening is performed when a load is applied to the bridging member from the driven arm member 530. There is a difference in how to endure in parts.

  That is, when the main body portion 528a1 is bent starting from the insertion portion 528a2 by the first bridge member 528a being pushed by the driven arm member 530, the auxiliary projection 528a3 separates from the drive arm member 520 (see FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary projection 528a3 and the inner side surface of the first pinning hole 527a2 causes a resistance against turning of the main body 528a1.

  On the other hand, when the main body portion 528b1 is bent starting from the insertion portion 528b2 by the second bridging member 528b being pushed by the driven arm member 530, the seat surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 is pressed against the driving arm member 520. It moves in the direction in which it can be used (see FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pinning hole 527b2, the seat surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 is the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 44B) of the main body plate portion 521. The force against the turning of the main body 528b1 is generated by being pressed against the

  Therefore, the resistance to the turning of the second bridging member 528 b can be made greater than the resistance to the turning of the first bridging member 528 a.

  The interaxial distance between the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinned hole 527b2 is longer than the interaxial distance between the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2.

  Due to the differences from the first to the third described above, the same load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upward in FIG. 44) When the second bridging member 528b is compared with the first bridging member 528a, the second bridging member 528b has a resistance force at the base portion against the turning (a force that can resist turning off at the fastening position with the driving side arm member 520). growing.

  With reference to FIG. 45, an aspect of contact between the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 when the driven arm member 530 is bent and deformed will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit 500 in the arrow XXXXVa direction view of FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are the driven side from the state of FIG. It is a fragmentary side view of rocking movement unit 500 which illustrated a situation that arm member 530 bends to the front side in a time series.

  45 (a) shows that the longitudinal directions of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel, and in FIG. 45 (b), the driven side arm member 530 is the front side (FIG. (B) The left side shows a state in which the first deflection bridge member 528a is in contact with the first deflection bridge member 528a, and in FIG. A state where it abuts on the bridging member 528 b is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridging member 528a is disposed closer to the moving member 540 as compared to the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven side arm member 530 is bent to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 and the contact with other members, the first bridge is first at a stage where the amount of bending is small. The driven side arm member 530 abuts on the bridging member 528a (see FIG. 45 (b)). Thereafter, when the deflection amount of the driven arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the second bridge member 528b abuts on the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 45C).

  That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 becomes larger at the portion in contact with the first bridging member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridging member 528a as compared to the second bridging member 528b. Be

  Here, when the resistance to the bending deformation of the first bridging member 528a is as large as that of the second bridging member 528b, the bending deformation of the first bridging member 528a is caused even if the deflection amount of the driven arm member 530 becomes large. There is a risk that this will not occur (instead of the drive side arm member 520 being bent). In this case, the driven arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b do not abut each other, and a load from the driven arm member 530 is independently received by only the first bridging member 528a. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridging member 528a is fastened to the driving side arm member 520 in such a manner that the first bridging member 528a can be easily turned over at the root compared to the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, before the driven arm member 530 abuts on the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is easily flipped (deforms with respect to the drive arm member 520 in the vicinity of the root).

  In addition, the width of the first bridging member 528a is narrower than that of the second bridging member 528b, and the plate thickness is formed to be equal (see FIG. 44). That is, the sectional coefficient of the second bridging member 528b in the same direction is larger than that of the first bridging member 528a in the direction of the load applied to the bridging member 528 from the driven arm member 530. Be done. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is more easily bent in the direction perpendicular to the short direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 45A) than the second bridging member 528b.

  Thereby, the pair of bridging members 528 can abut on the driven side arm member 530 to receive a load (see FIG. 45C), and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridging members 528 As a result, the durability of the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

  The method of receiving the load from the driven side arm member 530 by the pair of bridge members 528 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhanging width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridging member 528a longer than in this embodiment, the driven arm member 530 and the first bridge can be obtained with the amount of deflection shown in FIG. The bridging member 528 may not be in contact with the bridge member 528a, and the pair of bridging members 528 may simultaneously start to be in contact with the driven side arm member 530 with the amount of bending shown in FIG. In this case, the load from the driven side arm member 530 can be received by both the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b, and the load can be received by the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b. Can be distributed to

  On the other hand, when the amount of deflection is small (see FIG. 45B), it is difficult to suppress the deflection of the driven arm member 530 because the driven arm member 530 does not abut on either of the pair of bridging members 528. (The deflection is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven side arm member 530 until the amount of deflection in FIG. 45 (c) is reached).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the deflection amount of the driven side arm member 530 is small, the deflection can be suppressed by bringing the driven side arm member 530 into contact with the first bridging member 528a (FIG. 45). (B)). Moreover, as described above, when the deflection amount of the driven side arm member 530 increases, the first bridging member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b abut. As a result, the load from the driven arm member 530 can be received by the pair of bridging members 528, and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridging members 528 to bear the load, so that the first bridging member 528a and the first bridging member 528a The durability of the second bridging member 528 b can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridging member 528 will be described. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 taken along line XXXXIV-XXXXIV in FIG. In FIG. 46, in order to facilitate understanding, only sectional views of long parts of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are shown, and the shape of the end of each arm member 520, 530 is omitted. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 have substantially the same planar shape on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 46), and the bridging member 528 is the driven-side arm member 530. On the front side of the Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation), or the driving side arm member 520 moves to the back side along the arrow B2 (flexing deformation or falling deformation) It is possible to suppress the rotation (twist deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 along the arrow B3. That is, by the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530 being in contact with each other, relative movement (deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is disposed on the front side of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See Figure 42). As described above, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side on which the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 43). There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 falls forward, the driven side arm member 530 is supported (abutted) on the bridging member 528 from the front side. Thus, movement of the driven arm member 530 to the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) can be suppressed, and accordingly, movement of the moving member 540 to the front side can be suppressed.

  Since the drive side arm member 520 is a member to which the drive force is transmitted, the drive side arm member 520 may shake in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the condition of the transmission. The wobble can be suppressed by the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530 coming into contact with each other.

  On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (flexure deformation or fall deformation) or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the reverse direction of the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridging member 528 is moved in the direction away from the driven arm member 530, it is difficult to suppress the movement of the driving arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable to have a mechanism to prevent these movements. Next, referring to FIG. 47, movement of drive side arm member 520 to the front side along arrow B1 (flexure movement or falling deformation) is suppressed, and drive side arm member 520 is in the reverse direction of arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (twist deformation) will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit 500 taken along line XXXXV-XXXXV of FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is in contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side in FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is abutted from the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and additionally, the umbrella portion 523a is abutted from the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is disposed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to a straight line connecting axial support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. Provided (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

  Therefore, when the side of the drive side arm member 520 close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twistingly deforms in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 presses against the first gear portion 553a. And the umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction in which it is pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the movement (twist deformation) of the driving side arm member 520 in the reverse direction of the arrow B3 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passing plate 524 is disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the driving side arm member 520. Thereby, when the other end (right side in FIG. 47) of the drive-side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b When the sensor passing plate 524 abuts on the front plate member 560 in the portion, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to suppress movement (flexural deformation or falling deformation) of the other end of the drive side arm member 520 in the arrow B1 direction.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed to have a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, since the collar member 525 is formed in a smaller shape than the external shape of one end of the drive side arm member 520 in a front view, the collar member 525 enables the base member 510 and the drive side arm member The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance at the time of swinging the drive side arm member 520 can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be miniaturized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described. 48 to 50 are front views of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. FIG. In FIG. 48, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are disposed at the retracted position as in FIG. 42, and in FIG. 49, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are changed from the state of FIG. The state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount is illustrated in FIG. 50 in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are disposed at the extended position as in FIG. Also, in FIGS. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the illustration of the sensor passing plate 524 is omitted, and a part of the collar member 525 and the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 is a hidden line. While being illustrated, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted so that the gear teeth can be viewed.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened as it goes from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, the area in which the bridging member 528 covers the driven side arm member 530 increases as it goes from the retracted position to the extended position, and the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side to bridge the bridge member 528 The resistance generated from the bridging member 528 can be increased.

  As illustrated in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are the one side axial support hole 532 and the other side axial support hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below the straight line connecting it with 533. Therefore, at the retracted position, the driven-side arm member may change its posture in such a manner that the upper portion of the straight line connecting the one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between 530 and the bridging member 528 can be kept large. As a result, when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 falls forward and contacts the bridge member 528, whereby the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side It is possible to prevent the rocking resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are disposed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the driven arm member 530. . Therefore, it is possible to narrow the distance between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change in posture in a manner in which the one side pivotal support portion 532 serves as a starting point in the overhanging position. As a result, at the overhanging position, the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the inside where the deformation amount of the falling deformation of the driven arm member 530 is small.

  That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 5528b4 suppress the rocking resistance when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is disposed at the extended position. In the state, it is possible to make the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 come into contact with each other from the small amount of deformation of the falling deformation of the driven arm member 530.

  In addition, at least a part of the bridge member 528 is disposed on the front side of the driven arm member 530 while the driving arm member 520 goes from the position at the retracted position to the position at the projecting position. . Thus, the side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction while the bridging member 528 is not disposed on the front side of the driven arm member 530, and the side surface is disposed opposite to the driving side arm member 520 of the driven arm member 530. And the bridge member 528 can be prevented from abutting. Further, since the driven side arm member 530 can always be in contact with the bridging member 528, the effect of suppressing the positional deviation of the driven side arm member 530 in the axial direction can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are the side on which the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Take an inclined posture on the opposite side of the Therefore, in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in a front view), it may be necessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in a front view, and it is unnecessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the overhanging position. The power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the drive side arm member 520 are in contact in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left in FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

  That is, the driving force necessary for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553 b of the transmission gear 553 but also the side face of the first gear portion 553 a (front side in FIG. 48) It can also be transmitted by contact with the rear side of the portion 523. This can be rephrased that the rocking resistance of the drive side arm member 520 is reduced. Thus, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be miniaturized.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a lateral direction which is a perpendicular direction, and the longitudinal direction is a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. It is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 520. Thus, the collar member 525 and the base member extend in the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 as compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact along the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is enlarged.

  Therefore, the other end (the end on the left side in FIG. 48) of the drive side arm member 520 starts from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40) inserted in the one side shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 48). In the case of bending deformation in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface, the range in which the collar member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be enlarged. Thereby, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Further, a straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 always intersects with the circular outer shape of the main portion 525 a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. Thus, the distance between the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be minimized.

  In other words, since it is not necessary to insert the fastening portion 525c disposed in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear The inter-axial distance with the central axis of 553 can be formed short. The distance between the axes is a distance at which at least the main body 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be disposed opposite to each other. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

  Also, even when the axial distance between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 is the same, the fastening portion 525 c may be between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive side arm member 520 in the axial direction can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the end of the bridging member 528 of the rocking unit 500 is not fixed. However, in the rocking unit 2500 according to the second embodiment, the main portion 2561 of the front plate 2560 is A thickened portion 2561 a is provided to accommodate the tip of the bridging member 2528. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  51 (a) and 51 (b) is a partial front view of the rocking operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 51 (a) shows a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, In 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is shown in phantom.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the main body 2528a of the bridging member 2528 is formed across the width direction of the driven arm member 530. Thereby, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a in contact with the driven side arm member 530 is the first embodiment. The movement can be enlarged by comparison, and the movement of the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 2561 of the front plate member 2560 has a thickened portion 2561a which is thickened in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51) at its upper end portion, and is recessed downward from the upper end surface of the thickened portion 2561a And an accommodating portion 2561 b.

  The housing portion 2561b is a recess which is recessed in a state in which the four sides are closed in a top view, and the recess in which the tip end portion of the bridging member 2528 is housed when the moving member 540 is disposed at the overhang position. It is. The inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b includes a movement trajectory of the tip of the bridging member 2528 (the tip at the upper side in FIG. 51A). (The tip of the bridging member 2528 is It is formed in the aspect which does not contact | abut on the inner surface of the accommodating part 2561b. Thus, the bridge member 2528 is prevented from coming into contact with the inner side surface of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b while the moving member 540 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the overhanging position. Therefore, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 is moved to the front side (for example, falling deformation) and a load is applied to the bridging member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

  That is, when the leading end of the bridging member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodation portion 2561b, the bridging member 2528 is a cantilever supporting resistance against the load from the driven arm member 530 (load directed to the near side in FIG. 51). (The bridge member 2528 is fastened to the drive side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the end of the bridging member 2528 is housed in the housing portion 2561b, a resistance can be generated by double-supporting against a load from the driven arm member 530 (fastening with the driving arm 2520 Position and supported by receptacles 2561 b). Thus, movement of the driven arm member 530 to the front side can be suppressed.

  Further, since the bridging member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the driving side arm member 2520, the front end portion of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2561b, thereby performing positioning of the driving side arm member 2520 in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  In this case, it is possible to position the moving members 540 of the swinging operation unit 2500 formed by the left and right pair in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 8) In the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of relative positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 in the front-rear direction. Since the housing portion 2561b is disposed at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) of the pair of moving members 540 in comparison with the drive side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 that originate from the housing portion 2561b Misalignment can be reduced.

  As a result, the effect of correcting the positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 can be secured, and by rendering the pair of moving members 540 integrally visible in the state where the pair of moving members 540 are disposed at the overhang position, a rendering effect Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the rocking operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the swinging operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. It has a projecting portion 3523 b to be taken out. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the swinging operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a swing on the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of an operation unit 3500. In FIG. 52, only the base member 3510, the drive side arm member 3520, and the drive device 550 are illustrated for easy understanding, and the illustration of the other members is omitted, and the photo sensor 514 and the drive of the base member 3510 are shown. The illustration of the sensor passing plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 52 (b) the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member A state in which 540 (refer to FIG. 7) is rotated from the retracted position by a predetermined angle is illustrated, and in FIG. 52 (c), a state in which the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (refer to FIG. 7) Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the driving side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b extending outward in the axial radial direction from the umbrella portion 523a. The overhanging portion 3523 b is disposed below the second shaft portion 512 b without depending on the posture of the drive side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553 b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed by the above width (refer to Drawing 52 (b)). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is disposed opposite to the back side of the overhang portion 3523b.

  The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 curved along the outer periphery of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial radial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is convexly provided from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the side surface of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52D).

  From these, it can suppress that the drive side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) from the 2nd axial part 512b of the axis | shaft support part 512 as a starting point. That is, the drive side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b by the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and the lower side of the second shaft portion 512b. Move to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, the overhanging portion 3523 b abuts on the front end face of the outer peripheral wall 3516 in addition to the fact that the umbrella portion 523 a abuts on the front side face of the transmission gear 553. Thereby, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the drive side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by the abutment at the two positions.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the drive side arm member is compared to when the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at another position. The contact position between the transmission gear 553 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be a position separated from the second shaft portion 512 b in the axial radial direction.

  That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the overhanging position, the umbrella portion 523a is disposed to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhanging portion 3523b is the second gear portion. It is arranged opposite to the front side of the body portion of 553b. In this case, the overhanging portion 3523b can abut on the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement can not be seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

  Further, in the state where the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, since the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, the weight of the drive side arm member 3520 is determined by the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43). Movement in the front-rear direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position of the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be a position separated in the axial radial direction from the second shaft portion 512b. The resistance to the forward and backward movement of the 3520 can be increased to suppress the movement.

  Next, a combined operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth long hole without catching is described, but the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. In FIGS. 53 and 54, the collar member of the slide shaft portion 423e is not shown, and the shaft portion is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body 410 of the combined operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is disposed at an intermediate position, the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. Contact. A recessed portion 4424c which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b which is disposed directly above the abutting position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is equal to or larger than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the pivoting hole 423d disposed at the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and bounces back, the pivoting hole 423d bounces up and down. Therefore, the sliding shaft portion 423 e also bounces upward due to the momentum of the bounce in the vertical direction.

  The effect of the recess 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state immediately before the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b, and in FIG. 54 (b) the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 is The state immediately after abutting on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is illustrated. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, etc. are omitted for ease of understanding, and the moving direction of the opposite end of the slide shaft 423e and the slide shaft 423e. Are illustrated by arrows C41 to C44.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 423 is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft portion 423 e abuts on the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424 b and slides along the arrow C 41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft 423e abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and bounces back, and the other end of the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 follows the arrow C44. When it bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423 e abuts on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424 b and tries to slide along the arrow C 43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated with respect to the slide shaft portion 423e which is going to move in the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the slide shaft portion 423e from moving in the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the drive device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven along the inside of the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

  Next, a composite operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the end of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424. However, the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is a slide of the connecting member 5423. A plate spring member 5425 which is a plate-like spring member in contact with the end on the side of the shaft portion 423e is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 5423 moves in the left and right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

  The connection member 5423 includes a projecting portion 5423f which is provided to project from an end of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The protruding portion 5423f protrudes vertically upward in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 5423 is disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56 (c) The corner on the right side is rounded and chamfered, and the corner on the left side in a rear view is formed at a right angle.

  The guide plate 5424 is provided with a grip portion 5424c protruding in a U shape on the back side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The grip portion 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction, and one end of the plate spring member 5425 is held by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

  Details of the plate spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is illustrated in time series, and the vicinity of the guide hole 424b on the left side in a rear view is partially illustrated. In the case where the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is disposed at the retracted position, in FIG. 56 (b), the state where the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position toward the intermediate position by a predetermined distance is shown in FIG. In c), the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position is illustrated.

  For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decoration member 422, the connection member 5423, the guide plate 5424 and the plate spring member 5425 are shown, and the illustration of the other members is omitted. Further, only the outer shape of the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 is illustrated, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56A, the flat spring member 5425 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction, and a straight plate-like fixed portion 5425a whose one end is held by the holding portion 5424c. And a curved portion 5425b which is connected to the other end of the fixed portion 5425a and extends to the connecting member side to form a curve, and an end of the curved portion 5425b inside (right side in FIG. 56A) in the left-right direction And a fall prevention unit 5425c which is extended to the main.

  The curved portion 5425b is formed such that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed outside in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed inside in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is sharply inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to near a right angle).

  The fall prevention portion 5425c is in contact with the upper end portion of the protruding portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 5423 is disposed at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. Thus, even if there is a risk that the end on the opposite side of the gripping portion 5424c of the plate spring member 5425 may sag downward due to aged deterioration or the like, in the state of FIG. 56 (c), the projecting portion 5423f forms the plate spring member 5425 Since lifting is performed, the positional relationship between the plate spring member 5425 and the projecting portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to suppress that the end on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c of the plate spring member 5425 sags downward.

  Here, the change in the direction of the force generated between the protruding portion 5423 f and the plate spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the plate spring member 5425 are separated from each other, so between the projecting portion 5423f and the plate spring member 5425 No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (right side in FIG. 56A), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the projecting portion 5423f becomes a plate spring member 5425. They gradually approach and abut on in due course (see FIG. 56 (b)). Subsequently, the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end portion of the protruding portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, thereby moving the free end side of the plate spring member 5425 (right end side in FIG. 56). The end gradually moves upward.

  When the projecting portion 5423f is in contact with the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the plate spring member 5425, the force F51 applied from the projecting portion 5423f to the plate spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction of. That is, the force F51 is directed in the thickness direction of the plate spring member 5425, that is, in the direction in which the plate spring member 5425 is bent. In this case, of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction to the force F51, the component directed in the left-right direction is small, so when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves to the right, the leaf spring member 5425 It is suppressed that the movement of the connection member 5423 is hindered. Thus, the insertion shaft 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55) until the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position. can do.

  When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connection member 5423 reaches the end in the left and right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end on the right side in FIG. 56C) and bounces back, the protruding portion 5423f is a curved portion 5425b of the plate spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 is abutted (see FIG. 56 (c)).

  In this case, the force F52 applied from the projecting portion 5423f to the plate spring member 5425 is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the bending portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the plate spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the plate spring member 5425.

  Here, although the elastic deformation in the thickness direction is easily generated in the leaf spring, the elastic deformation in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring is not easily generated. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed in the longitudinal direction of the plate spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to near the right angle with respect to the left and right direction. This makes it possible to increase the resistance of the plate spring member 5425 to the bounce of the connection member 5423 and to prevent the connection member 5423 from moving. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56 (c)) of the guide hole 424b.

  Further, as described above, the projecting portion 5423f is chamfered such that the corner on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56C) is rounded and the corner on the left side in the rear view is formed at right angles. As a result, when the corner on the right side in the back view of the projecting portion 5423f abuts on the plate spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56 (b)), it abuts smoothly (does not bite), and the left side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view When the corner abuts on the plate spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56C), the projecting portion 5423f bites into the plate spring member 5425. That is, the corner on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view is fitted between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the plate spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

  The slide shaft portion 423 e is driven along the inside of the guide hole 4424 b in the left-right direction by moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the drive device 460 (see FIG. 21). In this case, the protruding portion 5423f pushes the curved portion 5425b of the plate spring member 5425 to move.

  Next, a combined operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the wiring guide arm 480 for guiding the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding, but in the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 for guiding the wiring can be expanded and contracted by slide movement. Is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed in the extended position. In FIG. 57, an extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480 is illustrated. In the stretched state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W disposed inside the wiring guide slide 6480 is formed almost linearly, with few places to be bent. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The wire guide slide 6480 is pivotally supported so as to be pivotable about the shaft support portion 472 and extends in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6481 into which the wire W is inserted and the slide long hole 6481 b of the first guide slide 6481. A second guide slide 6482 in which the wire W is inserted and slid along the extension direction of a slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and a third guide in which the wire W is inserted And the slide 6483.

  The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces disposed opposite to each other in the side surface of the main body portion 6481a A pair of slide long holes 6481b formed facing each other in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6481a, and an end portion of the main body portion It mainly includes an axial support hole 6481c, and a cylindrical cylindrical portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6481b and the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a are formed in parallel. The wire W is wound around the cylindrical portion 6481 d from below.

  The second guide slide 6482 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6481 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body 6482a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and its main body 6482a A pair of long slide holes 6482b formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and a main body portion 6482a And a pair of projecting portions 6482c which are provided on the outer side from the front and rear side surfaces of the first guide slide 6481 and are inserted into the slide long holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6481.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6482b and the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body 6482a are formed in parallel. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide long hole 6481b.

  The second guide slide 6482 is formed so that the projecting portion 6482c can slide on the inside of the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481, and during the movement, the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a. The inner surface of the through hole 6481a1 is abutted. That is, the distance from the central axis of the protruding portion 6482c to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a is from the central axis of the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 It is formed substantially equal to the distance to the outer side surface of the lower side surface. As a result, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid relative to the first guide slide 6481, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  The third guide slide 6483 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6483a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and its main body It mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6483 b which are provided to protrude outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483 a and are inserted into the slide long holes 6482 b of the second guide slide 6482.

  The third guide slide 6483 is formed so that the protruding portion 6483b can slide on the inside of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body 6482a during the movement. It abuts on the inner surface of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the protruding portion 6483b to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is the central axis of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 It is formed substantially equal to the distance to the outer side surface of the lower side surface. Thus, when the third guide slide 6483 is slid relative to the second guide slide 6482, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  Here, the inner side surface of the first guide slide 6481 and the outer side surface of the second guide slide 6482 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the inner side surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer side surface of the third guide slide 6483 are It is formed with a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

  As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides in priority to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6481, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

  58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial front views of combined operation unit 6400. FIG. In FIG. 58 (a), a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 30) is illustrated, and in FIG. 58 (b), a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. Ru.

  As illustrated in FIG. 58, in the wiring guide slide 6480, there is no location where the wiring W may be pinched, and disconnection of the wiring W can be suppressed. In addition, since there is no possibility of sandwiching the wire W, the arrangement distance between the wire W and the inner side surface of each of the guide slides 641, 6482, 6483 can be reduced. Thereby, the width in the short direction of the wiring guide slide 6480 can be suppressed.

  In the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the wiring W remains inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, the tension temporarily applied to the wiring W can be removed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a rocking operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridging members 528 is fixed to the drive side arm member 520 has been described, but the swinging operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridging members 7528 The bridging member 7528 a is formed to be swingable with respect to the driving side arm member 7520. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  59 (a) and 59 (b) is a partial front view of the rocking operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 59 (a), the state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 59 (b), and the state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated. Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridging member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is formed in the pivot hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the driving side arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported pivotally and biased clockwise in a front view by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is omitted from the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridging member 7528a is omitted and the pivotal support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed similarly. Further, the second bridging member 7528 b which is the larger side of the pair of bridging members 7528 is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the driving side arm member 7520.

  The driven side arm member 7530 is provided with a projecting portion 7534 which is provided on the front side of the main body plate portion 531 so as to abut on the first bridging member 7528a in the swing direction.

  Here, the driving arm member 7520 and the driven arm member 7530 are disposed relative to the axial support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534 in a state in which the driving arm member 7520 and the driven arm member 7530 are disposed in the retracted position The position changes (the position changes similarly to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520).

  By swinging the first bridging member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b is set at the extended position (see FIG. 59 (b)). It can be spread. Thereby, when the driven side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions (the end of the first bridge member 7528a and the end of the second bridge member 7528b) which can contact the bridge member 7528 Can be extended. In this case, it is possible to divide the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven side arm member 7530 can freely bend without coming into contact with the bridge member 7528, and the deflection amount of the driven side arm member 7530 Amount of movement) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, regardless of whether the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the other side axial support hole 533 can be maintained. it can. Here, the positional deviation of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520 is likely to occur in the other side shaft support hole 533 which is a connecting position with the moving member 540, and the positional deviation width tends to be large. In this embodiment, separation of the first bridge member 7528a from the other side shaft support hole 533 can be suppressed, and the effect of suppressing displacement of the driven arm member 7530 with respect to the drive arm member 7520 can be increased. Can.

  Further, when the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 59A), the first bridge member 7528a is biased by the torsion spring (not shown). It swings in the direction approaching the second bridging member 7528b. As a result, the drive side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridging member 7528 a and the second bridging member 7528 b is expanded, and the first bridging member 7528 a and the other axial support hole 533. Interference can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, a game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where light is irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by being erected on the base plate 8060. Light is emitted near the upper half of the plate 62. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed on the outer side of the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed in the embedding hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, the light irradiation device 8610 can prevent the thickness of the game board 8013 from increasing in the front-rear direction.

  Light is emitted from the light emitting device 8610 through the back side of the outer rail 62 to the inside of the game area. A mechanism for changing the traveling direction of the irradiated light to the front side (the front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 taken along line LXI-LXI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body 8611 fixed to the embedded hole 8013a, and a light irradiation part 8612 disposed on the side surface of the main body 8611.

  The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is embedded in the embedding hole 8013a in which the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed, and from the embedding hole 8013a to the lower side of the outer rail 62 along the back surface of the gaming board 8013 It is formed in the extension end of the light projection passage 8013b, which is a recess extending inward of the game area, and the light projection passage 8013b, and approaches the front side as it goes downward (inward of the game area) And a direction change portion 8013 c formed in an inclined manner.

  The embedded hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on a resin mold.

  The path E81 of the light emitted from the light irradiator 8612 is formed inside the light projection path 8013b and reaches the direction change portion 8013c and is reflected, so that the traveling direction of the light is the front side from the path E81 (FIG. It changes to the path | route E82 which turns to left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c for changing the traveling direction of light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of the light transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous, and the influence on the decoration of the game area can be reduced. it can. Thereby, the design freedom of the game area can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling on the path E82 is irradiated from below to the nail implanted in front of the game board 8013. This makes it possible to light up the shadow formed below the nail by the illumination of the hole. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering ability of the area under the nail, to make the ball easy to see when the ball passes the area under the nail, and to alleviate the burden felt by the player by the difficulty of seeing the ball. be able to.

  In particular, since the nail implanted at the top of the game board 8013 is disposed at a position where it can be seen from the player, light emitted from below the nail directs the reflected light reflected by the nail to the player. be able to. Thus, the nail which defines the flow path of the ball can be used as a member for effecting light.

  In addition, since the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, even if it is processed, it has less influence on the flow of the ball. For example, by processing the lower portion (lower half) of the nail in a crystal shape, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the performance of the nail can be enhanced.

  In addition, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color (for example, red) different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow), the nail irradiated with light and the other nails are discriminated. It can be easy to do.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light emitting devices 8610 may be provided on the game board 8013 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60), and light may be emitted in order. That is, after light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 at the left end in front view, light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 next to the right (the second from the left end in front view) and then right next to it (front The light may be emitted from the third light irradiator 8610 from the left end as viewed, and the same may be continued thereafter.

  According to this, by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610, the nails implanted in the game board 8013 light in order along the curved arrow R81. For example, if it is a game state advantageous to the player to perform a right-handed game, by making the nails implanted on the game board 8013 light in order along the curved arrow R81, the player will be made a right-handed game Can be signaled. As a result, the nail forming the flow path of the ball is given the effect of telling the player where to hit the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

  Note that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to nails. For example, light may be applied to a windmill disposed on the game board 8613, a through gate 67 (see FIG. 60) and the like.

  Next, a wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the pivotally supported portion has been described, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment An overhanging front locking portion 9482f disposed on the second guiding arm 9482 overlaps the first guiding arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Also, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are omitted for the sake of easy understanding.

  62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9481 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. It is a perspective view of locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially viewed in cross section, and the fitted portion of the overhang portion 9481d and the detachable front locking member 9481f is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 is provided with a detachable front locking member 9481f which is detachably formed on the overhanging portion 9481d and plate-like arm portions 9481a from both ends of the straight portion of the overhanging portion 9481d. It mainly includes a plate-like anti-slip plate portion 9481 g extending toward the other side and an other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h extending from the back surface side of the other-side bottom portion 481 e 2.

  In the plate-like arm 9481a, the formation of the notch 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. In this embodiment, as described later, since the detachable front locking member 9481 f is molded separately from the overhanging portion 9481 d, the notch portion 481 a 1 is unnecessary. Thus, the strength of the plate-like arm 9481 a can be secured.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the overhanging portion 9481d is provided with a fitting depression 9481d1 which is a depression having a semicircular cross section and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is a semicircular recess having a cylindrical fitting arm 9481f2 of a detachable front locking member 9481f described later and is fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1. Direction). Thus, a shape in which the fitting depression 9481d1 is formed by adding the shape for the fitting depression 9481d1 to the molding die of the fitting portion 9481d and extracting it in one direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 62A) is formed. 9481d can be easily manufactured.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius that is the same as or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the removal front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the overlapping portion 9481d.

  In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm 9481f2 can be made larger as compared with the case where the flat portion 9481d and the fitting arm 9481f2 hit each other between the flat surfaces, and the frictional force can be increased. Can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachment front locking member 9481 f from falling off the attachment portion 9481 d.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f includes a plurality of elongated plate-shaped main plate portions 9481f1 and a plurality of vertically extending cylindrical members extending from side surfaces in the thickness direction of the main plate portions 9481f1. And the fitting arm 9481 f 2 of

  When replacing the wiring W, for example, when the wiring W is broken by the detachable front locking member 9481 f being made removable from the overhanging portion 9481 d, the desorption front locking member 9481 f is removed to thereby enable the detachment front locking. It is possible to save time and effort for replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481 f and to make replacement of the wiring W easy.

  The plurality of fitting arms 9481f2 are portions that fix the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attaching portion 9481d by holding the attaching portion 9481d, and are juxtaposed at an interval slightly shorter than the thickness of the attaching portion 9481d. A pair of rod-like members are connected in series. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the overhanging portion 9481d, the pair of rod-like members of the plurality of fitting arms 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the overhanging portion 9481d, and the overhanging portion by the elastic recovery force Hold 9481d.

  The length of the fitting arm 9481f2 is formed slightly longer than the length in the width direction of the overhanging portion 9481f, and the tip of the fitting arm 9481f2 is directed toward the mating engagement arm 9481f2 on the other side that sandwiches the overhanging portion 9481f A projecting portion 9481f3 is formed to be protruded. When the projecting portion 9481f3 is hooked on the overhanging portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the front surface locking member 9481f from being detached from the overhanging portion 9481f to the front side (the front side in FIG. 62A).

  In this case, since the fitting arm 9481f2 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a hollow having a semicircular cross section, when the fitting arm 9481f2 sandwiches the overhanging portion 9481d by elastic recovery force. The axial center of the fitting arm 9481f2 is brought close to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. Thereby, positioning at the time of attaching attachment or detachment front latching member 9481f to attaching part 9481d can be made easy, and time which attachment takes can be shortened.

  The non-slip plate portion 9481 g is a portion for holding the wire W between the plate-like arm portion 481 a and continuously formed in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 62B) of the overhang portion 9481 d. It can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction of the overhang portion 9481 d and the plate-like arm portion 481 a. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g and the plate-like arm portion 481 a is usually set to a thickness equal to or less than the thickness of the wiring W, and the non-slip plate portion 9481 g It elastically deforms, and slippage of the wiring W with respect to the plate-like arm 481 a is suppressed by the elastic recovery force.

  The direction of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g is elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the overhang portion 9481 d. As a result, the wire W can be held between the antislip plate portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wire W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the overhang portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  The directions of the pair of anti-slip plate portions 9481 g are opposite to each other at both ends of the overhang portion 9481 d. Accordingly, regardless of the moving direction of the wiring W, it is possible to suppress movement of the overhanging portion 9481d and the wiring W in the longitudinal direction of the overhanging portion 9481d. The non-slip plate portion 9481 g is disposed to face the rib portion N. As a result, since the wire W can be suppressed at the middle portion (antinode) rather than at the tip of the anti-slip plate 9481g, the resistance applied to the wire W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

  The other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-like portion formed to have the same outer peripheral shape as the other side bottom portion 481e2, and from the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 to the other side cylindrical portion 481c in the circumferential direction of the other side cylindrical portion 481c. While extending about 120 degrees on the axis, and including an inclined side face 9481 h 1 at the extended tip. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the extended tip end of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. As a result, the wires W can be prevented from dropping off on the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 64A).

  The inclined side surface 9481h1 inclines to the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62B) as it goes away from the other side bottom portion 481e2.

  Fig. 63 (a) is a front view of the second guiding arm 9482, Fig. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guiding arm 9482, and Fig. 63 (c) is a LXIIIc of Fig. 63 (a). Fig. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second guiding arm 9482 taken along line LXIIIc.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 is provided with an overhanging front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end of the overhang portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the overhang portion 482d; An anti-slip plate 9482g is provided mainly extending from the end of the straight portion of the plate 482d and the plate-like arm 482a to the plate-like arm 482a and the overhanging portion 482d disposed opposite to each other.

  The extended front locking portion 9482f extends to the end opposite to the plate-like arm portion 482a across the extended portion 482d, and as it approaches the extended portion 482 from the extended end, the rear surface side (see FIG. 63). (C) An inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right) is provided.

  The technical concept of the non-slip plate portion 9482 g is the same as the technical concept of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is an LXIV c- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in a LXIVc line. In FIG. 64 (a), a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded is illustrated, and in FIG. 64 (b), the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are pivoted and opened. The condition is shown. Moreover, in FIG. 64 (a) and FIG. 64 (b), the wiring W is illustrated, and in FIG. 64 (c), the illustration of the wiring W is omitted.

  Here, in order to secure the arrangement area of another movable part, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480. Therefore, it is difficult to provide a space in a region for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-like arm portion 481 a and the overhang portion 9481 d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, the wire W is rubbed against the inner side surface of the wire guide arm 9480 every time the wire guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, and the wire W is deteriorated prematurely, and the durability of the wire W is increased. There is a risk of decline.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, the wire W is held between the non-slip plate portions 9481 g and 9482 g and the plate-like arm portions 481 a and 482 a, whereby the wire W is formed in the plate-like arm portion 481 a. , 482a and the additional portions 9481d, 482d are suppressed from moving relative to each other. Thereby, the durability of the wiring W can be secured.

  When the second guide arm 9482 is deformed in a twisting manner with respect to the first guide arm 9481, the wire W may also be twisted, and the durability of the wire W may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h is the second guide arm in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B). It overlaps with one side bottom portion 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h is extended in the circumferential direction of the other side cylindrical portion 481 c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481 e 2 (see FIG. 62 (b)).

  Therefore, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 have a positional relationship that allows them to abut in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 twists and deforms the first guide bottom 942h against the first guide arm 9481 in the direction to press the first bottom 482e1 against the second auxiliary bottom 9481h, the first bottom 482e1 and the second auxiliary bottom 9481h are abutted. , The deformation resistance of the torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the twist deformation of the wiring W, and the durability of the wiring W can be secured.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the overhanging portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. It overlaps in direction and is formed in the positional relationship which can be contact | abutted in the front-back direction (refer FIG.64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 twists and deforms the first guide arm 9481 in the direction to press the overhanging front engaging portion 9482f against the overhanging portion 9481d, the overhanging front engagement portion 9482f and the overhanging portion 9481d As a result, the deformation resistance of the torsional deformation is increased. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the twist deformation of the wiring W, and the durability of the wiring W can be secured.

  Further, when the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the second guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A). The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h are in contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front surface locking portion 9482 f are in contact with each other.

  In this case, since the back side of the second guide arm 9482 is in contact with the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the rear side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the second guide arm 9482 is twisted relative to the first guide arm 9481 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

  The same effect can also be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first Since the guide arms 9482 will be sandwiched, it is necessary to improve the alignment accuracy of the first guide arms 9481 and the second guide arms 9482.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion for suppressing the twisting of the second guiding arm 9482 is formed to be offset in the longitudinal direction of the second guiding arm 9482, so alignment of the first guiding arm 9481 and the second guiding arm 9482 is performed. The degree of accuracy required can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64) from the state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A). Before reaching (b), there is a possibility that the extended end of the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481 h abuts on the end surface of one side bottom portion 482 e 1 of the second guide arm 9 482.

  On the other hand, an inclined side face 9481h1 (see FIG. 62A) is formed at the extended end of the other auxiliary bottom 9481h, so that the extended end of the other auxiliary bottom 9481h is in contact with the end face of the one side bottom 482e1. Also in the case of contact, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be run on the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 64B) of the one side bottom portion 482e1. This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in an open state (see FIG. 64A).

  Also, from the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (FIG. 64 (a) In the meantime, the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may abut on the side surface of the overhang portion 9481d.

  On the other hand, since the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) is formed at the extended end of the overhanging front surface locking portion 9482f, the extended front end of the overhanging front surface locking portion 9482f is the flange portion 9481d. Even in the case of contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can run on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 64A) of the additional portion 9481d (see FIG. 64C). As a result, it is possible to easily form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in a folded state (see FIG. 64A).

  In the present embodiment, the case is described in which the overhanging front locking portion 9482f in contact with the overhang portion 9481d is formed on the front side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair on the front side and the back side. Thus, regardless of the direction of the torsional deformation of the second guide arm 9482, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be made to abut on the overhang portion 9481d, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are torsionally deformed. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 to FIG. 80, the operation unit 200 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the guide holes 413 are arranged in the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the main body member 410. However, in the combined operation unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment, the guide holes 10413 correspond to the left and right ends of the main body member 10410. It is disposed near an intermediate position between the left and right centers. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65, the composite operation unit 10400, the rocking operation unit 500, and the two-way operation unit 700 are accommodated inside the outer wall portion 212 of the operation unit 200 in the tenth embodiment.

  In FIG. 65, unlike in FIG. 5 of the first embodiment, among the cover members disposed in a pair of left and right, illustration of the member on the left side is omitted, whereby the leg member 10440 is made visible. As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, a biasing spring 445 for biasing the leg member 10440 upward is disposed in a manner of being wound around a pulley. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, a spring having a natural length can be used as the biasing spring 445 as compared with the case of straightly expanding and contracting, whereby the biasing force with respect to the vertical movement amount of the main body member 10410 The amount of change can be slowed down.

  The combined operation unit 10400 is a unit that performs the same operation as the combined operation unit 400 of the first embodiment. Further, the two-direction operation unit 700 is a unit for effect disposed between the pair of swing operation units 500, and is operated by the rotation operation of the disc member 720 by a single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75). It is a unit which performs an effect and an effect by the slide operation of the operation member 750 in an overlapping area in front view. Hereinafter, the combined operation unit 10400 will be described first, and then the two-way operation unit 700 will be described.

  66 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 10400. FIG. The state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position in FIG. 66 is the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position in FIG. 67, and the body member 10410 is disposed at the extended position in FIG. The state is illustrated. Also, in FIGS. 66 to 68, in order to facilitate understanding, only the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 is shown, and the illustration of the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the compound operation unit 10400 is a body member 10410 that slides in the vertical direction, and a shielding member that is disposed on the front side of the body member 10410 and rotates based on the movement of the body member 10410. 10420, a swing member 430, a leg member 10440, a guide member 450, a drive device 460, a rear upper plate 470 (see FIG. 21), and a wire guide arm 480 (see FIG. 21). . In order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the biasing spring 445 is omitted.

  Here, the swing member 430, the guide member 450, the drive device 460, the rear upper plate 470 (see FIG. 21), and the wiring guide arm 480 (see FIG. 21) have the configurations described in the first embodiment. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted. The leg members 10440 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main body member 10410 and the shielding member 10420 also have substantially the same configuration as the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations.

  The main body member 10410 is different from the main body member 410 in the first embodiment in that the guide hole 10413 is closer to the center position of the main body member 10410 (near each division position when the main body member 10410 is divided into three in the left-right direction) Be placed.

  The guide holes 10413 extend along a straight line at an inclination angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal line and the vertical line, as shown by a hidden line in FIG.

  The shielding member 10420 is different from the shielding member 420 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 is closer to the central position of the main body member 10410 in the assembled state so as to correspond to the arrangement of the guide hole 10413. Will be placed.

  Further, the pair of shielding members 10420 includes a coupling surface S10 which abuts on each other in a state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The coupling surface S10 is configured such that the central axis of the pivotal support rod 423c is disposed on the surface extending the coupling surface S10. Therefore, the coupling surface S10 abuts on each other in a state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 68).

  Here, the action of gravity applied to the shielding member 10420 will be described. In the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position or the intermediate position (see FIG. 66 or FIG. 67), one member of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 formed of a pair of members (FIG. 66 front view left The center-of-gravity position G10 of the other member (hereinafter referred to as "one member of the shielding member 10420") is disposed on the right side in a front view than the insertion shaft portion 10421c. In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67 is one end position (front clockwise direction) in the movement range of one member of the shielding member 10420, and the gravity load is directed to the one end position side. .

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or 67, the operation of one member of the shielding member 10420 can be prevented from being disturbed.

  That is, since only the insertion shaft portion 10421c is supported by the main body member 10410 in one member of the shielding member 10420, for example, shielding is performed while the main body member 10410 moves (drops) at high speed from the retracted position to the intermediate position. One member of the member 10420 is left behind by inertia, and in this state, the insertion shaft portion 10421c may slide on the guide hole 10413, and one member of the shielding member 10420 may move relative to the main body member 10410.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity position G10 is disposed on the side where one member of the shielding member 10420 is pushed by gravity toward the one end position side with reference to the insertion shaft portion 10421c. Even if the members are left behind due to inertia, it is possible to prevent one member of the shielding member 10420 from rotating in the opposite direction (counterclockwise direction in a front view) on one end position side.

  Although one member of the shielding member 10420 is also supported by the connecting member 423, the connecting member 423 serves as the shielding member 10420 at the retracted position and the intermediate position of the main body member 10410 (see FIGS. 66 and 67). Since one of the members is not pulled in the vertical direction, the connecting member 423 is not in a relationship of lifting and supporting one member of the shielding member 10420. Therefore, it can be considered that one member of the shielding member 10420 is supported at one point by the insertion shaft portion 10421c while the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position.

  On the other hand, while the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the connecting member 423 pulls one member of the shielding member 10420. Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the change of the gravity center position G10 of one member of the shielding member 10420 based on the movement of the main body member 10410 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the coupling member 423 is disposed at the end (moving end) of the guide hole 424 b of the guide plate 424. Therefore, when the main body member 10410 is moved further downward from the intermediate position, the swing base member 10421 is lifted as much as the connecting member 423 can not move.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68, when the main body member 10410 is lowered to the overhanging position, the postures of the pair of rocking base members 10421 change, and a state (contact state) where the coupling surfaces S10 abut each other is configured. .

  In the present embodiment, in the contact state, the pair of rocking base members 10421 perform an effect that makes the player feel as if they are a single large member (a member having a semicircular or semi-doughnut shape). I'm aiming for that. Therefore, it is desirable to contact them so that a gap does not occur between the coupling surfaces S10. For this purpose, one member of the shielding member 10420 described above including one member of the swing base member 10421 is rotated in the forward rotation direction CCW1 (counterclockwise direction in front view) about the insertion shaft portion 10421c. It is necessary to generate a load in the direction of

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the extended position, the connection member 423 lifts the swing base member 10421 so that a load in the forward rotation direction CCW1 is generated.

  Therefore, since all of the weight of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 is usually applied to the connecting member 423, the connecting member 423 may be made heavy to be heavy, or the material of the connecting member 423 may be used. There is a problem that the cost of parts increases due to custom-made. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by the main body member 10410 supporting the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421, the main body member 10410 can be configured to receive a part of the load applied to the connecting member 423. The connecting member 423 can be made of a lightweight and general-purpose material.

  On the other hand, since the swing base member 10421 is configured to be supported by the connecting member 423 and the main body member 10410 in this manner, for example, in the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed in the overhanging position, When the load causing the swing base member 10421 to rotate in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction CCW1 is received by gravity, or a load that raises the main body member 10410 is generated by the elastic force of the biasing spring 445 (see FIG. 19) When the main body member 10410 is slightly moved upward, the rocking base member 10421 may rotate based on the movement, and the coupling surface S10 may be separated.

  Therefore, it is desirable to increase the weight so as to maintain the main body member 10410 at the lower end position of the movement range, but in the case of always making it heavy, the driving force of the drive device 460 is excessive, which is not desirable. It is also conceivable to maintain the vertical position of the main body member 10410 in a state where the drive motor 462 of the drive device 460 is fixed, but in this case, the power is cut off when the operation object is disposed at the lowermost end. Power consumption is large and undesirable as compared to conventional products that can reduce power consumption.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the separated state (see FIG. 66) in which the coupling surface S10 of the swing base member 10421 is separated, the gravitational load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 is in the reverse direction of the normal rotation direction CCW1. The gravity center position G10 is arranged to be in the direction along, while in the abutting state (see FIG. 68), the gravity load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 is in the direction along the normal direction CCW1 (coupling surface The center-of-gravity position G10 is arranged so as to be in the direction of pressing S10).

  That is, the state shown in FIG. 66 (the state in which the main body member 10410 is disposed in the retracted position) and the state shown in FIG. 68 (the state in which the main body member 10410 is disposed in the extended position) The center of gravity G10 is reversed at the insertion shaft portion 10421c. As a result, the swing base member 10421 tries to rotate in the direction to maintain the contact state by its own weight in the contact state at the extended position, so that the load (biasing spring 445) for maintaining the main body member 10410 at the extended position. The driving force generated by the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) can be assisted with respect to (see FIG. 65).

  That is, if the force for pulling the main body member 10410 upward with the biasing spring 445 (see FIG. 65) balances the weight of the main body member 10410 and the other members supported by the main body member 10410, the main body member 10410 is Although stopping can be continued at the lowermost end, in order to counteract the tension of the biasing spring 445 if the tension of the biasing spring 445 is set high beforehand to increase the momentum at the rising start, It is necessary to compensate the drive force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) downwards to compensate for the less weight of the main body member 10410 and the other members supported by the main body member 10410 than the tensile force.

  If the weight driven by the drive motor is a non-deformable mass, only its weight is the subject, but as in the present embodiment, when the swing base member 10421 is displaced relative to the main body member 10410, In addition to the weight of the heavy item (the main body member 10410 and the like), it is necessary to generate a force required for resistance at relative displacement.

  In this embodiment, the center of gravity G10 of the swing base member 10421 is disposed on the side that suppresses the displacement of the swing base member 10421. Therefore, when the main body member 10410 is maintained at the lowest point, the main body member 10410, etc. The resistance of the swing base member 10421 relative to the main body member 10410 acts as a force against the tensile force of the biasing spring 445 in addition to the weight of the main body member 10410. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) for maintaining the main body member 10410 at the lowermost end can be reduced while setting the tensile force of the biasing spring 445 high beforehand.

  In the state shown in FIG. 68, due to the gravity load applied to the center of gravity G10 of the swing base member 10421, the left and right direction outer portion is downward and the left and right direction inner portion is upward with the insertion shaft portion 10421c as the center. A moment in the direction of rotation is applied in a moving manner. At this time, an upward load is applied along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the insertion shaft portion 10421c on the connection portion (the pivot support rod 423c (see FIG. 69)) of the swing base member 10421 and the connection member 423. Be Therefore, the downward load applied to the connecting member 423 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 423 can be prevented from being broken.

Further, the horizontal distance between the gravity center position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c in the state shown in FIG. 68 is equal to or less than the horizontal distance between the gravity center position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c in the state shown in FIG. Be done. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 68, the horizontal distance between the gravity center position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c is maximum.
By this, the state shown in FIG. 68 is given to the swing base member 10421 by gravity as compared with the state shown in FIG. 66 (while changing from the state in FIG. 66 to the state in FIG. 68). Because the load in the rotational direction can be reduced, the posture of the swing base member 10421 can be easily maintained in the state shown in FIG. 66, and the posture change of the swing base member 10421 can be made easy in the state shown in FIG. .

  Next, the lifting operation in which the main body member 10410 moves from the extended position toward the intermediate position will be described.

  The insertion shaft portion 10421 c moves in the guide hole 10413 based on the upward movement of the main body member 10410. Here, as described above, the inclination angle θ10 of the guide hole 10413 is 45 degrees. Therefore, based on the main body member 10410 moving upward and the insertion shaft moving upward by the vertical distance Y10, the insertion shaft 10421c moves horizontally by the same horizontal distance X10 as the vertical distance Y10.

  Here, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves in the left-right direction, the vertical distance Y10 coincides with the movement distance in the vertical direction of the main body member 10410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 68, the insertion shaft portion 10421c is inclined and moved upward in the lateral direction (in a circular orbit centered on the pivot support 423c (see FIG. 70) Move along). Therefore, the vertical distance Y10, which is the vertical movement distance of the insertion shaft portion 10421c, can be shortened relative to the vertical movement distance of the main body member 10410. As a result, in the upward movement of the main body member 10410, the insertion shaft portion 10421c is lowered relative to the main body member 10410, so the load applied to the main body member 10410 downward from the insertion shaft portion 10421c can be reduced. it can.

  At this time, the operation mode of the upward movement of the swing base member 10421 rotates in a direction in which the pair of swing base members 10421 move away from each other with the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 70) whose position does not change It becomes an aspect.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are lifted with the posture as it is, the drive force necessary for the drive device 460 at the time of starting the main body member 10410 to rise can be reduced.

  Further, the barycentric position G10 of one member of the shielding member 10420 is based on the insertion shaft portion 10421c while the main body member 10410 moves from the overhanging position to the intermediate position (from the state of FIG. 68 to the state of FIG. 67). The left and right positions change from left to right. That is, the load due to the weight of one member of the shielding member 10420 is from a state in which the load due to the weight of one member of the shielding member 10420 is directed to rotate the one member of the shielding member 10420 in the forward direction CCW1. Then, one member of the shielding member 10420 is switched to the direction of rotating in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction CCW1. Thus, when one member of the shielding member 10420 rotates based on the upward movement of the main body member 10410, the load (operating resistance) applied to the main body member 10410 from one member of the shielding member 10420 can be reduced. .

  Further, since the position of the pivot support rod 423 c does not change, the weight of the connection member 423 does not become an operational resistance at the time of starting the main body member 10410 to rise. Therefore, as compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are lifted together with the connecting member 423, the driving force necessary for the drive device 460 at the time of starting the main body member 10410 to rise can be reduced.

  Here, maintaining the contact state of the coupling surface S10 can also be performed, for example, by disposing a magnet fixed to the coupling surface S10 and using the magnetic force of the magnet. However, in this case, when operating the swing base member 10421 from the abutting state to the separated state, it is necessary to generate a load for removing the adsorption by the magnet, so the load at the start of the drive device 460 increases. . As a result, the load required to start the main body member 10410 in the upward direction from the extended position is increased, and the driving force required for the drive device 460 is increased, thereby increasing the product cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 is constituted only by its own weight and a force (such as tensile force) generated by the rigidity of the members in the relationship with the connecting member 423 and the main body member 10410. Be done. Therefore, the force required to move the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 from the abutting state in which the coupling surface S10 abuts to the separated state is different from the case where the members are attracted by magnetic force, It is only the force opposite to the force generated by the stiffness. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive device 460 at the time of starting of the main body member 10410 can be reduced.

  The arrangement route of the electrical wiring to the shielding member 10420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. 69 and 70 are rear views of the combined operation unit 10400. 69 shows that the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position, and FIG. 70 shows that the main body member 10410 is disposed at the extended position. Also, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the drive device 460, the rear upper plate 470, and the wiring guide arm 480 are omitted for ease of understanding.

  The relative positional relationship between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 of the shielding member 10420 when the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position is the same as the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position. This is also used in the description of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 69, as a difference between the main body member 10410 and the main body member 410 in the first embodiment, in the main body member 10410, an insertion hole 10411a for inserting the wire W10 in the base member 10411 is drilled. .

  By being inserted into the insertion hole 10411 a, when the wire W10 passes from the rear to the front of the main body member 10410, the wire W10 can be passed inside the outer shape of the main body member 10410. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W10 from unintentionally interfering with the swing base member 10421 and preventing the wiring W10 from being visually recognized by the player. In addition, since the insertion hole 10411a itself acts as a means for bundling the wires W10, another bundling band or the like can be made unnecessary.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the insertion hole 10411a is drilled at a position where the swing base member 10421 is always disposed on the front side of the main body member 10410 while the swing base member 10421 is moving. Thus, the wiring W10 can be prevented from being viewed by the player in a front view. Note that the insertion holes 10411a are also left-right symmetrical with respect to the center position of the main body member 10410 in the left-right direction even in the rear view right side which is a portion hidden behind the printed circuit board B10 in FIG. It is arranged in the shape of

  Here, in the case where the electric wiring is disposed on the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422, the rear case 210 (FIG. 6) in the operation of the main body member 10410 in order to reduce the area where the electric wiring is visually recognized by the player. It has been carried out to pass the electrical wiring in a part where the moving distance from the reference) is short. In this portion, in the present embodiment, the connecting member 423 which operates only when the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position is considered to be applicable. This is because the main body member 10410 does not operate while moving from the intermediate position to the extended position.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the connecting member 423 is configured as a support member not having a role as a decorative member, the player can not easily recognize the connection by making the connecting member 423 of a colorless and transparent material. If it is desirable to divert the electrical wiring to the connecting member 423, the electrical wiring can not be made colorless and transparent, so the electrical wiring may attract the player's awareness, and there is a fear that the effect will be disturbed. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wire W for transmitting a signal to the swing member 430 is disposed in the wire guide arm 480 (see FIG. 33) connected to the main body member 10410. The wiring W is connected to a printed circuit board B10 disposed in the main body member 10410, and an electrical wiring is extended from the printed circuit board B10 to the swing member 430. Similarly, the wire W10 extends from the vicinity of the printed circuit board B10, is fixed to the back side of the main body member 10410, holds the wire inside the frame, and passes through a holding member H10 extended to the vicinity of the insertion hole 10411a. Then, it passes through the insertion hole 10411a.

  Note that the holding member H10 has a wall surface (a wall surface that abuts the back surface of the main body member 10410) for restricting the passage of the wiring W10 between the main body member 10410 and the opposite side of the main body member 10410 ) Is partially opened, and the partially open portion is provided with a claw portion extended from the end face on the near side so as to cover the wiring W10.

  By including the above configuration in the holding member H10, the wiring W10 can be prevented from interfering with the insertion shaft portion 10421c moving the guide hole 10413, and the wiring W10 is assembled from the back side (the wiring W10 is a claw portion It can be made easy to insert into the inside of the holding member H10 while being hooked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a connecting portion between the main body member 10410 and the leg member 10440 will be described. FIG. 71 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXI-LXXI of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the leg member 10440 is provided with an inclined surface 10447 on the root side of the connection fixing portion 442 which is a connection portion with the main body member 10410. The inclined surface 10447 is formed to be inclined at an inclination angle β1 in side view, in a mode in which the side surface on the front side protrudes to the front side (left side in FIG. 71) as the position decreases. Since the side surface on the back side of the main body member 10410 is fixed to the side surface, the main body member 10410 itself is also in a posture of projecting toward the front side toward the lower portion.

  This makes it possible to prevent the holding portion 415 (see FIG. 23) from coming off the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) in the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 66).

  That is, the compound operation unit 10400 is composed of a long member extending in the left and right direction of the main body member 10410, and since both ends in the left and right direction are supported, the compound operation unit 10400 is easily bent in the up and down direction and the front and back direction ) Mode. In the first embodiment and the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 (see FIG. 21) is disposed on the front side of the main body members 410 and 10410, the center of gravity is closer to the front side, and the main body members 410 and 10410 are frontward. It was easy to deform in a falling manner.

  Therefore, when the main body member 410 is assembled in parallel with the leg members 440 as in the first embodiment, the most deformable central portion of the main body member 410 is obtained by deformation in such a manner that the main body member 410 falls forward. The holding portion 415 (see FIG. 23) disposed at the upper end portion of can easily disengage from the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) (displacement in the front-rear direction may occur). Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body member 410 may fall at an unexpected timing.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the inclined surface 10447 is formed on the base side of the connection fixing portion 442 which is the connection portion between the main body member 10410 and the leg member 10440, whereby the main body member 10410 is rotated in the backward direction. It is assembled in the posture which turned to.

  Accordingly, it is possible to offset the change in posture caused by the deformation in which the main body member 10410 tilts forward, and to make it difficult for the holding portion (see FIG. 23) to be detached from the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21). The magnitude of the inclination angle β1 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the magnitude of the inclination angle β1 is 5 degrees.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the contact and separation between the main body member 10410 and the shielding member 10420 during the vertical movement of the main body member 10410 will be described. FIG. 72 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 66, FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional view of a combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV of FIG. 68. 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding, the swing member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the cross section of the decoration member 422 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the main body member 10410 is disposed below the pair of guide holes 10413 along a straight line parallel to the extending direction of the guide holes 10413 (the direction of the letter H in front view; see FIG. 66). And a support plate 10413 b which is provided in a plate shape in the thickness direction of the main body member 10410.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72, the support plate 10413b is extended to a position below the insertion shaft portion 10421c to abut on the back side surface of the shielding member 10420. Further, the extending height of the support plate 10413 b is configured to decrease as approaching the center of the main body member 10410 in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 66), the connecting member 423 is pushed upward, and a load is generated to lift the swing base member 10421 upward from the connecting member. Since the center of gravity position G10 is closer to the front side (left side in FIG. 72), the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 turn forward with the connecting portion between the insertion shaft portion 10421c and the main body member 10410 as an axis. In the direction (corresponding to the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 72, corresponding to the second direction), the posture is such that it tilts forward at the first twist angle α1.

  Therefore, the portion of the swing base member 10421 below the insertion shaft portion 10421c, which is the connection position with the main body member 10410, approaches the main body member 10410 side, and in this state, the back side of the decorative member 422 and the support plate The contact with the front end of 10413 b causes resistance (frictional resistance).

  Due to this resistance, when the main body member 10410 moves, relative movement between the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 and the main body member 10410 can be prevented. That is, from the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 66) to the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 67) (this direction and the opposite direction correspond to the first direction) Even if the speed at the start is high, it is possible to prevent the situation where the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are left behind because only the main body member 10410 is lowered.

  As described above, since the main body member 10410 in which the support plate 10413b is disposed is projected to the front side toward the lower portion, the contact position between the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b is determined. It can be at a high position. As a result, the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b, which are front-side down due to gravity, are compared with the case where the surface on which the support plate 10413b of the main body member 10410 is disposed is uniform (non-overhanging). Because the load generated during the period can be increased, the degree of freedom in arranging the center-of-gravity position G10 to generate the necessary resistance can be improved.

  The resistance between the support plate 10413 b and the swing base member 10421 can be generated by magnetic force, but in this case, when the magnet is pulled away, the space between the support plate 10413 b and the swing base member 10421 The load (reaction) in the reverse direction that occurs is increased, and the members may vibrate, which may affect the effect. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, such a reaction does not occur, so it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73, in the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 67), the connecting member 423 is disposed at the lower end of the vertical movement, and the swing base member 10421 and the decoration Member 422 begins to receive upward load F10 from connecting member 423 in the opposite direction to gravity.

  By this load F10, the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 rotate in the backward rolling direction (corresponding to the clockwise direction in FIG. 73, the second direction) with the connecting portion of the insertion shaft portion 10421c and the main body member 10410 as an axis. And the body member 10410 is in a posture to fall forward at a second twist angle α2. Here, the second twist angle α2 is slightly smaller (in the present embodiment, one degree) than the first twist angle α1.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the rising posture (the posture in which the second twist angle α2 is turned forward), the back surface of the decoration member 422 and the tip of the support plate 10413b are separated. Thereby, the resistance between the main body member 10410 and the rocking base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 can be reduced, and the main body member 10410 is extended from the intermediate position (see FIGS. 67 and 73) (FIGS. 68 and 68). 74) to reduce the operating resistance in the case of sliding movement toward the end.

  When the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 operate relative to each other, so that the operating resistance is reduced, so that the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 Can be performed smoothly, and the driving force of the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66) can be suppressed.

  Also, when the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the distance between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 does not change, and the distance between the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b changes Do. Thereby, compared with the case where the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 are separated in the front-rear direction while the main body member 10410 is moving, the change of the operating resistance between the swing base member 10421 and the main body member 10410 is It can be difficult for the player to realize that it will happen.

  Therefore, the operational resistance between the swing base member 10421 and the main body member 10410 can be reduced while minimizing the odd feeling of the effect (while maintaining the unity of the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421). it can.

  The change in posture between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73 is a change in posture in the direction in which the length in the short direction of the decorative member 422 formed from the elongated shape in the left-right direction is changed. Therefore, even if the angle of posture change becomes large, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the difference in the length of the decoration member 422, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort of the effect felt by the player.

  Further, the change between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73 is a change in posture along the extending direction (supporting direction) of the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 supported by the main body member 10410. It is. The insertion shaft portion 10421c is extended in the front direction from the back side as viewed from the player. Since this change in direction is a change in perspective, the positional relationship between the members does not change, and this is a change that causes partial scaling. Therefore, for example, the player can make it difficult to grasp that a change has occurred, as compared with a change along the extending direction of the surface of the game board 13 (a change that causes a change in the positional relationship of each member). . As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the effect felt by the player.

  In the change in attitude between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73, the driving force that acts is only the driving force by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66). That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for separate driving devices for changing the postures of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 with respect to the main body member 10410. As a result, the overall configuration of the combined operation unit 10400 can be reduced in weight.

  At the boundary shown in FIG. 73 (see FIG. 67), whether or not an upward load is generated on the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 via the connecting member 423 is switched. That is, since whether or not the postures of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are switched can be switched on the condition of the arrangement of the main body member 10410, the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 do not depend on the operation speed of the body member 10410. Can change the attitude of

  Therefore, when driving the drive motor 433 at high speed or at low speed, the main body member 10410, the swing base member 10421, and the decoration member 422 are separated at the boundary where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the middle position. The operating resistance between them can be changed.

  Also, when starting up the main body member 10410 from the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed in the extended position (see FIGS. 68 and 74), the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 with respect to the main body member 10410 are Since the resistance can be reduced, it is possible to avoid the situation where the weight of the shielding member 10420 is directly applied to the main body member 10410 without the relative movement of the swing base member 10421 to the main body member 10410. Thus, the driving force required for the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66) can be reduced when the main body member 10410 is started upward from the extended position, and the drive motor 433 can be miniaturized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80, the bidirectional operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the bi-directional operation unit 700, and FIG. 76 is an exploded back perspective view of the bi-directional operation unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the bi-directional operation unit 700 includes a body member 710 forming a framework, a disc member 720 rotatably supported by the pivot hole 711 of the body member 710, and a circle thereof. A thick-walled gear 730 into which the rotating shaft 722 of the plate member 720 is inserted and fixed, a drive unit 740 generating a driving force to rotate the thick-walled gear 730, and a sliding operation up and down in conjunction with the rotation of the disc member 720 An operation member 750, a support member 760 supporting the operation member 750 so as to slide up and down, and a cover member 770 shielding the support member 760 in an invisible manner.

  The main body member 710 includes a shaft support hole 711 bored in the front and rear direction at the central portion, and a cylindrical portion 712 cylindrically extended rearward from the edge of the shaft support hole 711 and a gear. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) shaft support rods 713 to support and a support groove portion 714 to support the drive motor 741 are mainly provided.

  The cylindrical portion 712 supports the thick gear 730. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 712 slides on the outer peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 731 of the thick gear 730, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 712 is the inner peripheral of the outer cylindrical portion 732 of the thick gear 730. It is supported in a sliding manner with the surface.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the thick gear 730 is not positioned by the rotation shaft 722 of the disk member 720, but the thick gear 730 is positioned on the cylindrical portion 712, and the thick gear 730 is a circle. It comprises from the aspect by which the rotating shaft of the plate member 720 is supported. As a result, even if a load in the vertical direction is applied to the disc member 720, it is possible to suppress displacement of the thick gear 730 in the direction perpendicular to the axis based on that.

  The disc member 720 includes a disc portion 721 formed in a disc shape from a light transmitting material, a rotary shaft 722 extending in the thickness direction from a central portion of the disc portion 721, and a disc portion A pair of transmission protrusions 723 are provided mainly on the opposite side of the rotation shaft 722 of the shaft 721.

  The rotating shaft 722 is a rod-like member rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 711 of the main body member 710. A plurality of LEDs are disposed on the front side of the main body member 710 in a region shielded by the disc portion 721 in a state where the rotary shaft 722 is axially supported by the main body member 710.

  The pair of transmission convex portions 723 are arranged in such a manner that the center of a straight line connecting the transmission convex portions 723 coincides with the rotation axis 722.

  The thick gear 730 is mainly formed of a bottomed cylindrical shape having a hollow inside, and mainly includes an inner cylindrical portion 731 formed at the center of the bottom and an outer cylindrical portion 732 having a gear formed on the outer peripheral surface. .

  Here, the height of the inner cylinder portion 731 extending from the bottom portion is reduced, while the height of the outer cylinder portion 732 extending from the bottom portion is increased and abuts on the rear side surface of the main body member 710 in the assembled state. Placed as possible. That is, since the disposition of the inner cylindrical portion 731 is at a position away from the main body member 710, the thickness of the support portion of the thick gear 730 becomes long. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft 722 with respect to the thick gear 730 while suppressing the inclination of the attitude of the thick gear 730 with respect to the main body member 710.

  The drive device 740 is disposed on the front side of the main body member 710, and is disposed in a manner such that the rotation shaft protrudes from the support groove 714 to the back side, and the drive gear 742 fixed to the drive motor 741. And a plurality of gear groups for transmitting the driving force from the drive gear 742 to the thick gear 730, and mainly includes a transmission gear 743 pivotally supported by the shaft support rod 713.

  The operation member 750 includes a plate-like main member 751 disposed on the back side of the support member 760, a plate-like auxiliary member 752 sandwiching the support member 760 from the front side in relation to the main member 751, and the main member A pair of an abutment member 753 fixed to the back side of the 751 and abutting on the transmission convex portion 723 and a pair of rotatably supported at a symmetrical position across the engagement plate portion 764 on the front side of the main member 751 The rotating member 754 is mainly provided.

  The main member 751 is accommodated in the first elongated hole 761 of the support member 760 and is provided with a width slightly smaller than the width of the first elongated hole 761 and a first protruding configuration in which the coil spring CS10 is connected to the tip. And a pair of second projections which are accommodated in the pair of second elongated holes 762 of the support member 760 and which have a slightly smaller width than the second elongated holes 762 and to which the auxiliary member 752 is fastened and fixed at the tip A pair of shaft support holes circularly drilled at a position symmetrical to the left and right of the installation portion 751b and the first projection portion 751a at positions adjacent to the left and right of the engagement plate portion 764 of the support member 760 And 751c.

  The first projecting portion 751 a and the second projecting portion 751 b have a shape relationship with the first elongated hole 761 and the second elongated hole 762 of the support member 760 so that the operating member 750 has the first elongated hole 761 and the second elongated hole. When operating in the extending direction (vertical direction) of 762, tilting of the posture of the operation member 750 can be suppressed.

  The abutting member 753 is disposed above the transmission convex portion 723 of the disc member 720, and interferes with the rotation locus of the transmission convex portion 723 in a state where the operation member 750 is disposed at the lowermost end, and the transmission convex portion The lower side in contact with 723 is formed from a curved shape having a larger radius of curvature than the outer peripheral circle of the rotation locus of the transmission convex portion 723.

  Therefore, with the rotation of the disk member 720, the driving force is transmitted to the contact member 753 via the transmission convex portion 723 and the operation member 750 moves up and down. The details of the up and down operation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.

  The rotating member 754 has a main body portion 754a for producing effects by a rotational operation, a rotary shaft 754b which is provided in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the main body portion 754a to the back side and rotatably supported in a support hole 751c. And an engagement protrusion 754c which is provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the rotation shaft 754b.

  The engagement protrusion 754 c is disposed between the engagement plate portion 764 of the support member 760. Thus, the engaging projection 754c is pushed from the engaging plate portion 764 when the operating member 750 operates upward or downward, and the rotating member 754 rotates (see FIGS. 77 and 78). ).

  The supporting member 760 has a first long hole 761 accommodating the coil spring CS10 whose upper end is connected to the operation member 750, and a pair of second lengths disposed on the left and right of the first long hole 761. A pair of holes 762, a wedge-shaped connecting portion 763 to which the lower end of the coil spring CS 10 is connected, and a pair of convexly formed plate-like shapes spaced above and below the first long holes 761. And an engagement plate portion 764 of the

  The operation of the bidirectional operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b) are front views of the bidirectional operation unit 700. FIG. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operation of the operation member 750 based on the rotational movement of the disk member 720 is illustrated in time series, and is understood. For the sake of simplicity, the illustration of the cover member 770 is omitted, and the inside of the transmission convex portion 723 of the disk member 720 and the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 are filled.

  From the configuration described above, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the thick gear 730 via the transmission gear 743 (see FIG. 75) by the rotational operation of the drive motor 741, and the disc member 720 fixed to the thick gear 730 is Rotate. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b), changes in the state of the bidirectional operation unit 700 based on the rotation of the drive motor 741 are illustrated.

  That is, FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the attitude of the disk member 720 is such that the pair of transmission convex portions 723 are aligned horizontally, and FIG. 77 (b) is shown in FIG. 77 (a). From the state, a state where the disk member 720 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view is illustrated.

  In FIG. 78 (a), a state in which the disk member 720 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 77 (b) (a state in which the pair of transmission convex portions 723 are vertically aligned) is illustrated. In FIG. 78 (b), a state in which the disk member 720 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) is illustrated.

  From FIG. 78 (b), when the disk member 720 further rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view, the disk member 720 only rotates half from the state shown in FIG. 77 (a). The state of the operation unit 700 returns to the state shown in FIG. 77 (a).

  That is, when the disc member 720 rotates half, the operation member 750 moves up and down by one reciprocation. Therefore, for example, the single projection moves based on the rotation of the disk member 720, and the reciprocating cycle of the vertical movement of the operation member 750 is shortened (halved, as compared with the case where the operation member 750 is moved up and down. )be able to. Thereby, even when it is desired to operate the operation member 750 at high speed, the rotational speed of the drive motor 741 can be suppressed. Therefore, when the operating speed of the operating member 750 is increased, the operating speed required for the drive motor 741 can be reduced, so that the performance required for the drive motor 741 can be reduced, and the drive motor 741 can be miniaturized. Can be Further, based on shortening of the operation cycle of the operation member 750, the cycle of the swinging operation of the rotation member 754 can also be shortened.

  When the drive motor 741 continues to rotate, the disk member 720 continues to rotate, and the state changes from FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 78 (b), and further returns to FIG. 77 (a). . Therefore, the contact position of the transmission convex portion 723 of the disk member 720 and the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 can always be arranged above the rotation shaft 722 of the disk member 720 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, when a single protrusion moves based on the rotation of the disc member 720, for example, a long hole extending in the left-right direction is disposed in the operation member 750, and the single protrusion is inside the long hole. In the case of sliding, the movement of the operation member 750 always interlocks with the rotational movement of the disc member 720, so the number of kinds of movement decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 is only supported from the lower side by the transmission convex portion 723, the rotational speed of the disk member 720 is slow and fast. The operation mode of the operation member 750 can be changed.

  That is, the downward movement of the operating member 750 is due to the gravity and the elastic force generated from the coil spring CS10, and the transmission convex portion 723 acts on the abutting member 753 before the operating member 750 is moved downward by these forces. In the case where the disk member 720 is rotated at the rotational speed in contact, the mode in which the operating member 750 is maintained in the upper part of the moving range (the mode shown in FIG. 77 (b) and the mode shown in FIG. The operation member can be operated in the manner as maintained in the state shown in FIG. 78 (a). Thereby, the operation mode (operation range) of the operation member 750 can be made different depending on whether the rotational speed of the drive motor 741 is low or high.

  In FIGS. 77 and 78, the case where the disk member 720 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view has been described, but in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a laterally symmetrical shape, Also in the case where the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is reversed and is continuously rotated, the operation member 750 can be similarly moved up and down.

  Here, when the rotational direction of the disk member 720 is reversed, the range in which the transmission convex portion 723 abuts with the contact member 753 can be changed. That is, when the disk member 720 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, one portion abuts against the contact member 753 across the straight line passing through the transmission convex portion 723 and the rotation shaft 722 (see FIG. 77 (b)) On the other hand, when the disk member 720 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the other part abuts on the contact member across a straight line passing through the transmission convex portion 723 and the rotation shaft 722 (see FIG. 78B).

  Therefore, by reversing the rotation direction of the disk member 720 every predetermined period, it is possible to reduce the degree of wear of the transmission convex portion 723 caused by the contact between the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 (wear Parts can be dispersed), and the life of the transfer convex portion 723 can be extended.

  The vertical displacement of the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 is the same regardless of the rotational direction of the disk member 720, but as shown in FIG. Since it is shifted to the left and right (in this embodiment, from the shape of the main member 751 to the left in front view), the transmission convex portion 723 abuts on the contact member 753 depending on the rotation direction of the disk member 720 The inclination adjustment of the operation member 750 and the abutment member 753 at the time of start of contact (at the start of contact) is different.

  That is, when the disk member 720 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the transmission convex portion 723 abuts on the lower right portion of the contact member 753, and the center of gravity of the operation member 750 The operation member 750 is slightly inclined in a manner to rotate counterclockwise in a front view from the relationship of (the contact position is on the right than the center of gravity position). On the other hand, when the disk member 720 rotates clockwise in a front view, as shown in FIG. 78B, the transmission convex portion 723 abuts on the lower left portion of the contact member 753, the center of gravity of the operation member 750 The transmission convex portion 723 pushes up the position from the lower side, and the operation member moves upward without changing the posture.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the rotational direction of the disc member 720 by checking whether the operating member 750 is slightly inclined by staring at the time of starting the operating member 750 to start rising. As described above, the configuration is such that the rotation direction of the disk member 720 can be grasped without difficulty, and the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is changed depending on whether the degree of expectation of the jackpot is small or large. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of confirming the rotation direction of the disc member 720 only to the player who is playing the game, and to configure in a mode that only the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the pair of transmission protrusions 723 are disposed at the same position vertically, the operation member 750 is disposed at the lowermost end, but in this state, from the abutting member 753 The transmission convex portion 723 is disposed to be separated downward. Therefore, even if the casing vibrates for any reason and the operation member 750 vibrates up and down, the collision between the contact member 753 and the transmission convex portion 723 due to the vibration can be prevented. Damage to the portion 723 and the abutment member 753 can be prevented.

  The curved shape of the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of the transmission convex portion 723 of the disc member 720 and the contact member 753. FIG. 80 (a) is a vertical view of the operation member 750 when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. FIG. 80 (b) is a graph showing displacement, and FIG. 80 (b) is a graph showing the moving speed of the operation member 750 in the vertical direction when the disk member 720 is rotated at a constant speed.

  In FIG. 79, the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 of the disk member 720 are shown in a model view. Further, as a comparison, the outline of the lower side surface that abuts when the lower surface of the abutting member 753 is a flat surface and the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed at the initial position P10s is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), changes in the case where the disk member 720 rotates once are illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the transmission convex portion 723 of the disk member 720, the outer periphery of the rotation locus is formed with a radius R10, and the curved portion 753a which is the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 753 is larger than the radius R10. It is formed of a large curved shape with a radius of curvature. In addition, the connection part of a pair of left and right curved parts 753a is comprised from planar shape.

  In the present embodiment, since the curved portion 753a is formed not in a linear shape but in a curved shape, it is possible to suppress a change in the operating speed of the operating member 750. This will be described below.

  In FIG. 79, a locus in the case where the transmission convex portion 723 rotates by a predetermined angle is illustrated. That is, from the initial position P10s, which is a position horizontally moved to the right from the rotation shaft 722, via the first position P10h, which is a position rotated counterclockwise by an angle θ10a (θ10a <45 degrees), A locus when reaching the second position P10e, which is a position rotated counterclockwise from the position P10h by the angle θ10a, is illustrated.

  In FIG. 80A, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time, and the vertical axis is the arrangement of members in the vertical direction, and the displacement Yr of the transmission convex portion 723 in contact with the operation member 750 and the lower surface of the contact member 753. The relationship between the vertical displacement Ya of the operating member 750 and the vertical displacement Yb of the operating member 750 in the present embodiment is illustrated. In addition, the curve of displacement Ya and displacement Yr is formed from the shape which connected the sine wave from 0 degree to 180 degree.

  80B, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents the velocity of the member in the vertical direction, and the velocity Vr of the transmission convex portion 723 in contact with the operation member 750 and the lower surface of the contact member 753. The relationship between the vertical velocity Va of the operating member 750 and the vertical velocity Vb of the operating member 750 in the present embodiment is illustrated in the case where the plane is formed from a flat surface. The curves of the velocity Va and the velocity Vr are formed in a shape in which cos waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees are connected.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 (a), when the transmission convex portion 723 rotates at the same speed, the angle between the initial position P10s and the first position P10h, the first position P10h and the second position The angle between the same and P10e is the same at the angle θ10a, but since the transmission convex portion 723 operates on a rotational trajectory, the vertical movement distance while the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the initial position P10s to the first position P10h The dL 10 a is different from the movement distance dL 10 b in the vertical direction while the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the first position P 10 h to the second position P 10 e. In other words, the moving distance dL10b on the way up is shorter than the moving distance dL10a at the start of the rising of the operation member 750 in the same time.

  Therefore, for example, when the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), even if the disk member 720 is rotated at a constant speed, The operation speed of the up and down movement of the contact member 753 fluctuates for each phase of the transmission convex portion 723. Therefore, when it is desired to suppress the fluctuation of the moving speed of the abutting member 753 in the vertical direction, the rotational speed of the disc member 720 needs to be complicatedly changed, which causes a problem that the control becomes complicated. In addition, when the control is performed in a complicated manner, the disc member 720 does not rotate at the same speed, and therefore both the disc member 720 and the operation member 750 can not be operated at the same speed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation member 750 is not arranged to move in the overhang state which is visually recognized by the player and in the retracted state which is not visually recognized, but is always arranged at a position visually recognized by the player. It is believed that the demand for operating the plate member 720 and the operating member 750 at the same speed is likely to occur.

  To this requirement, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a curved shape. More specifically, when the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed from a flat surface, the recess along the upper and lower sides from the flat surface to the position where the transmission convex portion 723 contacts when it is disposed at the first position P10h. The installation distance is a recessed distance dL10c, and from the position where the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed at the first position P10h to the abutting position when the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed at the second position P10e. The curved portion 753a is formed in a mode in which the recessed distance along the upper and lower sides is the recessed distance dL10d.

  Then, the curved shape of the bending portion 753a is formed in such a manner that the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL10c from the moving distance dL10a is longer than the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL10d from the moving distance dL10b (dL10a-dL10c > DL10 b-dL10 d).

  Thereby, based on the transmission convex portion 723 rotating, the variation caused in the moving speed in the vertical direction of the operation member 750 can be absorbed by the curved shape of the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753, and the disc In the situation where the member 720 rotates at a constant speed, it is possible to suppress the speed fluctuation of the vertical movement of the operation member 750. Therefore, the effect of operating the rotating disk member 720 and the sliding operation member 750 at the same operation speed can be performed by rotating the single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75) at the same speed. it can.

  Here, it is possible to make the sliding member move at a constant speed while rotating the disc member 720 at a constant speed, but it is also possible to convert the rotational movement of the gear into a linear movement with a rack. In addition to the space for arranging the rack, it is necessary to reverse the operation direction of the drive motor 741 during linear reciprocation. When the drive motor 741 is reversely rotated, the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is also reversed, and the constant velocity rotation operation of the disk member 720 can not be maintained. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the operating member 750 can be reciprocated linearly by rotating the disk member 720 in one direction at a constant speed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transmission convex portion 723 is formed as a pair, and the curved portion 753 a of the contact member 753 is replaced by replacing the transmission convex portion 723 that contacts the contact member 753 every half rotation of the disk member 720. The disk member 720 and the operation member 750 can be operated at the same operation speed by a simple method of forming the curved portion from the curved shape. This will be described below.

  For example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is formed of a single protrusion, the contact convex portion 723 is in the first quadrant (see FIG. 1) in the contact aspect between the contact convex portion 753 and the transmission convex portion 723 formed in a curved shape. The upper right region out of the four regions divided by the vertical line passing through the rotation shaft 722 and the horizontal line at 79. The order of the first quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, and the fourth quadrant every 90 degrees counterclockwise. Are placed in the second quadrant, or placed in the third quadrant, or placed in the fourth quadrant.

  In the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed into a curved shape that is convex upward, so that the difference in the operation speed of the transmission convex portion 723 is absorbed. In this case, the transfer convex portion 723 is preferably disposed in the first quadrant or the second quadrant, but a problem occurs in the case of being disposed in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant.

  That is, for example, in the case where the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed in the third quadrant, if the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753 is formed to have an upwardly convex curved shape as in this embodiment, the curved shape When the transmission convex portion 723 starts to rotate from the left end (see FIG. 79), the lowering speed of the contact member 753 further increases, thereby promoting the speed change of the operation member 750, and the speed of the operation member 750 I can not suppress the change.

  Also, for example, in the case where the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed in the fourth quadrant, if the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753 is formed to have an upwardly convex curved shape as in the present embodiment, Since the rising speed of the contact member 753 further increases as the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the lower end (see FIG. 79) to the right, the speed change of the operating member 750 is promoted, and the speed of the operating member 750 I can not suppress the change.

  Therefore, in order to continue suppressing the fluctuation of the operating speed of the operation member 750 while rotating the disc member 720 at a constant speed, the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant. It is necessary to avoid the contact between the contact member 723 and the contact member 753.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the transmission convex portions 723 at an interval of 180 degrees, when one transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant, the first quadrant or Since the other transmission convex portion 723 disposed in two quadrants is configured to abut on the abutting member 753, the transmission convex portion 723 disposed in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant and the abutting member 753 are in contact with each other. It is possible to avoid contact.

  Next, a combined operation unit 11400 and a bidirectional operation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the swing base member 10421 is supported by the guide hole 10413 in which the extending direction and the longitudinal direction of the main body member 10410 are formed in parallel is described, but the combined operation in the eleventh embodiment In the unit 11400, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 11413 for supporting the swing base member 10421 is formed to be inclined in the thickness direction with respect to the extending direction of the main body member 10410.

  In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in FIGS. 81 to 83, the swing member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the illustration of the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 is omitted.

  81 is a cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 11400 in the eleventh embodiment taken along the line corresponding to LXXII-LXXII line in FIG. 66, and FIG. 82 is the combined operation unit along the line corresponding to line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of 11400 and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 11400 along a line corresponding to line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68.

  In FIG. 81, a state in which the main body member 11410 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the main body member 11410 is disposed at the intermediate position is illustrated. The state of being placed in the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the main body member 11410 includes a guide hole 11413 for supporting the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421. The guide hole 11413 is formed from the same inclination angle as the guide hole 10413 of the tenth embodiment in a front view, while extending in the direction inclined in a manner of projecting to the front side (left side in FIG. 81) Be done.

  More specifically, in the cross section shown in FIG. 82, the overhang width W11a from the side surface on the back surface side of the base member 10411 to the back surface side end portion of the guide hole 11413 (of the lateral end in the front view) In the cross section shown in FIG. 83, the overhanging width W11b from the side surface on the back surface side of the base member 10411 to the back surface side end portion of the guide hole 11413 (the end in the left and right direction in front view) It is comprised from the aspect which a change of width produces continuously, as it is misplaced to a front view left-right direction. That is, the extending direction of the guide hole 11413 is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward and inward in the front view.

  On the other hand, the support plate 10413b disposed below the guide hole 11413 is configured in such a manner that the extending height decreases as approaching the center of the main body member 11410 in the left-right direction, as in the tenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the distance from the tip end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 81) of the guide hole 11413 to the tip end portion of the support plate 10413b is shorter than the distance D11a at the lower end position while the distance D11b at the upper end position is shorter and the lower end position The distance is gradually shortened from the point to the upper end position.

  In the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the back side surface of the decoration member 422 abuts on the front side end of the support plate 10413b. Thus, the operation resistance of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 with respect to the main body member 11410 can be increased, so that relative movement of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 with respect to the body member 11410 is suppressed. be able to.

  On the other hand, as the insertion shaft portion 10421c slides upward in the guide hole 11413 from the state shown in FIG. 82, the swing base member 10421 moves away from the main body member 11410 along the inclination of the guide hole 11413. Since the movement is performed in a mode, the front end of the support plate 10413b and the back surface of the decoration member 422 are separated (see FIG. 83).

  Thereby, in the operation of causing the swing base member 10421 to operate relative to the main body member 11410 as in the case of moving the main body member 11410 from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the operating resistance of the relative operation is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the operation of combined operation unit 11400 can be smoothed.

  In addition, since the support plate 10413b and the decorative member 422 do not contact in the projecting state of the main body member 11410 (see FIGS. 68 and 83), when starting the main body member 11410 upward, the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member It is possible to avoid a situation in which the weight of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 is applied to the body member 11410 without the relative movement of the body 422 with the body member 11410. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 462 (refer to FIG. 65) necessary at the time of the rising start of the main body member 11410 can be suppressed.

  The change between the state shown in FIG. 82 and the state shown in FIG. 83 is a change in posture along the extending direction (supporting direction) of the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 supported by the main body member 11410. . The insertion shaft portion 10421c is extended in the front direction from the back side as viewed from the player. Since this change in direction is a change in perspective, the positional relationship between the members does not change, and this is a change that causes partial scaling. Therefore, for example, the player can make it difficult to grasp that a change has occurred, as compared with a change along the extending direction of the surface of the game board 13 (a change that causes a change in the positional relationship of each member). . As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the effect felt by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, the bidirectional operation unit 11700 will be described. The two-way operation unit 11700 is formed with the lower side of the contact member 11753 so that the operation member 11750 moves up and down at a constant speed when the disc member 720 rotates at a constant speed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The curved shape of the contact member 11753 of the operation member 11750 will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the disk member 720 and the contact member 11753, and FIG. 85 (a) is a graph showing the vertical displacement of the operation member 11750 when the disk member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. FIG. 85 (b) is a graph showing the moving speed in the vertical direction of the operation member 11750 when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. In FIG. 84, the disk member 720 and the contact member 11753 are shown in a model view. Further, as a comparison, the outline of the lower side surface that abuts when the lower surface of the abutting member 753 is a flat surface and the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed at the initial position P10s is illustrated by an imaginary line. 85 (a) and 85 (b) show changes in the case where the disk member 720 makes one rotation.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the transmission convex portion 723 of the disk member 720 is formed such that the outer periphery of the rotation locus has a radius R10, and the lower side surface of the contact member 11753 has a curved shape having a larger radius of curvature than the radius R10. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed in a curved shape instead of a linear shape, so that the operation speed of the operation member 11750 can be suppressed from changing for each position. This will be described below.

  In FIG. 84, a locus in the case where the transmission convex portion 723 rotates by a predetermined angle is illustrated. That is, from the initial position P10s, which is a position horizontally moved to the right from the rotation shaft 722, via the first position P10h, which is a position rotated counterclockwise by an angle θ10a, from the first position P10h to an angle θ10a A trajectory when reaching the second position P10e, which is a position rotated counterclockwise, is illustrated.

  In FIG. 85A, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents the arrangement of members in the vertical direction, and the displacement Yr of the transmission convex portion 723 in contact with the operation member 11750 and the lower surface of the contact member 11753. The relationship between the displacement Ya in the vertical direction of the operation member 11750 and the displacement Y11b in the vertical direction of the operation member 11750 in the present embodiment is illustrated. In addition, the curve of displacement Ya and displacement Yr is formed from the shape which connected the sine wave from 0 degree to 180 degree.

  85B, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents the velocity of the member in the vertical direction, and the velocity Vr of the transmission convex portion 723 in contact with the operation member 11750 and the lower surface of the contact member 11753. The relationship between the vertical velocity Va of the operation member 11750 and the vertical velocity V11b of the operation member 11750 in the present embodiment is illustrated in the case where the plane is formed from a flat surface. The curves of the velocity Va and the velocity Vr are formed in a shape in which cos waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees are connected.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 (a), when the transmission convex portion 723 rotates at the same speed, an angle between the initial position P10s and the first position P10h, a first position P10h, and a second position. The angle between the same and P10e is the same at the angle θ10a, but since the transmission convex portion 723 operates on a rotational trajectory, the vertical movement distance while the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the initial position P10s to the first position P10h The dL 10 a is different from the movement distance dL 10 b in the vertical direction while the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the first position P 10 h to the second position P 10 e. In other words, the moving distance dL10b on the way up is shorter than the moving distance dL10a at the start of the rising of the operation member 11750 within the same time.

  Therefore, for example, in the case where the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction, the velocity Va is shown in FIG. Thus, the operation speed of the up and down movement of the contact member 11753 is fluctuated for each phase of the transmission convex portion 723. Therefore, when it is desired to move the contact member 11753 up and down at a constant speed, the rotational speed of the disk member 720 needs to be complicatedly changed, which causes a problem that the control becomes complicated. In addition, when the control is performed in a complicated manner, the disc member 720 is rotated based on the control, and the constant speed rotation operation is not performed. Therefore, both the disc member 720 and the operation member 11750 are operated at the same speed. I can not do it.

  In the present embodiment, the operation member 11750 is not arranged to move in the extended state which is visually recognized by the player and in the retracted state which is not visually recognized, but is always arranged at a position visually recognized by the player. It is considered that a request to operate the operation member 11750 at a constant speed easily occurs in a state where the plate member 720 rotates at a constant speed.

  In response to this request, in the present embodiment, the curved portions 11753a, which are the left and right sides of the lower surface of the contact member 11753, absorb the change in the vertical movement speed of the transmission convex portion 723 and the speed of the vertical movement of the operation member 11750 Is formed from a curved shape that makes the

  More specifically, when the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed as a flat surface, a recess along the upper and lower sides from the flat surface to the position where the transmission convex portion 723 contacts when it is disposed at the first position P10h. From the position where the installation distance is a recess distance dL11c and the transmission projection 723 is disposed at the first position P10 h to the abutment position when the transmission projection 723 is disposed at the second position P10 e The recessed distance along the upper and lower sides is taken as the recessed distance dL11d.

  In this situation, the left and right sides of the lower surface of the contact member 11753 are such that the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL11c from the moving distance dL10a is equal to the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL11d from the moving distance dL10b. A curved shape of a certain curved portion 11753a is formed (dL10a-dL11c = dL10b-dL11d).

  As a result, due to the rotational movement of the transmission convex portion 723, the variation occurring in the moving speed in the vertical direction of the operation member 11750 can be absorbed by the curved shape of the contact member 11753, as shown in FIG. As shown, the speed V11b of the vertical movement of the contact member 11753 can be made constant except for the folded back portion of the operation member 11750, and the operation member 11750 is vertically moved in a situation where the disc member 720 rotates at a constant speed. It can be operated at the same speed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect of always operating the rotating disk member 720 and the sliding operation member 11750 at the same speed only by rotating the single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75) at the same speed.

  Here, it is also possible to convert the rotational movement of the gear into a linear movement with a rack while operating the sliding operating member 11750 at the same speed while rotating the disc member 720 at the same speed, but in that case In addition to the space for arranging the rack, the operation direction of the drive motor 741 needs to be reversed during the linear reciprocation. When the drive motor 741 is reversely rotated, the rotational direction of the disk member 720 is also reversed, and the constant velocity motion of the disk member 720 can not be maintained.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the disc member 720 in one direction at the same speed, the operation member 11750 can be reciprocated linearly at the same speed except for the folded portion.

  Here, in the directly upper portion of the rotation shaft 722, the hanging portion 11753b on the lower side surface of the contact member 11753 is provided so as to protrude downward. The hanging portion 11753b moves the contact member 11753 even when the velocity component along the vertical direction of the transmission convex portion 723 approaches 0 just above the rotation shaft 722 (see the velocity Vr in FIG. 85 (b)). A portion for maintaining the velocity at a constant velocity, the shape of which is created by the equation (dL10a−dL11c = dL10b−dL11d) described above. Since the moving distance of the transmission convex portion 723 in the vertical direction is small right above the rotating shaft 722, in order to establish the above equation, the negative number in the portions corresponding to the recessed distances dL11c and dL11d The pitting portion 11753b is projected downward.

  As described above, by disposing the hanging portion protruding downward between the pair of left and right curved portions 11753a, the abutting member 11753 is compared with the case where the pair of curved portions 11753a is formed as a flat surface. It is possible to secure a long period of time in which the moving speed in the vertical direction is maintained at a constant speed, particularly at the upper end position of the moving range.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the inclination of the change in the velocity when the direction of the velocity Vr changes from the top to the bottom (the tangent of the curve of the velocity-time graph) When the direction of the velocity V11b changes from top to bottom, the gradient of the velocity change is more abrupt. That is, as compared with the case where the pair of curved portions 11753a is formed as a flat surface, the speed V11b deviates from the constant velocity state, and the period T11 required to reverse the operating direction of the contact member 11753 is shortened.

  Therefore, an aspect when the moving direction of the operation member 11750 in which the abutting member 11753 is disposed is switched at the upper end position can be easily configured from an aspect in which the pin ball is reflected by the wall. As a result, the player can easily recognize the effect as operating the operation member 11750 at a constant speed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transmission convex portion 723 is formed as a pair, and the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is replaced by replacing the transmission convex portion 723 which contacts the contact member 11753 every half rotation of the disc member 720. Both the disc member 720 and the operation member 11750 can operate at the same speed by a simple method of forming from a curved shape. This will be described below.

  For example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is formed of a single protrusion, the transmission convex portion 723 is in the first quadrant (as shown in FIG. The upper right region of the four regions divided by the vertical line passing through the rotation shaft 722 and the horizontal line at 84. The first quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, and the fourth quadrant in counterclockwise direction every 90 degrees Are placed in the second quadrant, or placed in the third quadrant, or placed in the fourth quadrant.

  In the present embodiment, the curved portion 11753a of the contact member 11753 is formed to have an upwardly convex curved shape, thereby absorbing the difference in the operation speed of the transmission convex portion 723. In this case, the transfer convex portion 723 is preferably disposed in the first quadrant or the second quadrant, but a problem occurs in the case of being disposed in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant.

  That is, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed in the third quadrant, as in the present embodiment, the curved portion 11753a which is the left and right side portions of the lower side surface of the contact member 11753 has an upward convex curved shape. Once formed, the curved shape further promotes the speed change of the operation member 11750 because the lowering speed of the contact member 11753 further increases when the transmission convex portion 723 starts to rotate from the left end (see FIG. 84). As a result, the operating member 11750 can not be operated at the same speed while rotating the disc member 720 at the same speed.

  Also, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed in the fourth quadrant, as in the present embodiment, the curved portion 11753a which is the left and right side portions of the lower side surface of the contact member 11753 has an upwardly convex curved shape. Once formed, the curved shape further accelerates the rising speed of the contact member 11753 as the transmission convex portion 723 moves from the lower end (see FIG. 84) to the right, thereby promoting the speed change of the operation member 11750 As a result, the operating member 11750 can not be operated at the same speed while rotating the disc member 720 at the same speed.

  Therefore, in order to keep the operation member 11750 operating at a constant speed while rotating the disc member 720 at a constant speed, the transmission convex part 723 and the transmission convex part 723 are arranged in a state where the transmission convex part 723 is disposed in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant. It is necessary to avoid contact with the contact member 11753.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the transmission convex portions 723 at an interval of 180 degrees, when one transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant, the first quadrant or Since the other transmission convex portion 723 arranged in two quadrants is configured to abut on the abutting member 11753, the transmission convex portion 723 arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant and the abutting member 11753 are in contact with each other. It is possible to avoid contact.

  Next, a combined operation unit 12400 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In the tenth embodiment, the guide member 10413 of the main body member 10410 is extended along a single straight line. However, the combined operation unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment has the guide hole 12413 of the main body member 12410. However, the extension direction is extended in the middle in a bending manner. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Also, in FIGS. 86 to 88, the illustration of the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 is omitted.

  86 to 88 are front views of the combined operation unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment. 86 shows the state where the main body member 12410 is disposed at the middle position, FIG. 87 shows the state where the main body member 12410 is slightly lowered from the middle position, and FIG. The state of being placed in the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the main body member 12410 is provided with a guide hole 12413 which is an elongated hole for supporting the insertion shaft portion 10421 c of the swing base member 10421. The guide holes 12413 differ from the guide holes 12413 of the tenth embodiment only in the extending direction.

  The guide hole 12413 in the present embodiment is composed of three regions in which the extending direction is different. That is, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 86, the first area A1 disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the main body member 12410, the second area A2 coupled to the inner portion of the first area A1, and A third area A3 extending mainly inward in the left-right direction of the main body member 12410 from the upper end portion of the second area A2 is mainly provided.

  The first area A <b> 1 is an area configured from an extending direction in which the main body member 12410 is inclined upward and to the left and right. In the state where the insertion shaft portion 10421c is disposed at the outer end of the first area A1, the main body member 12410 is disposed at the retracted position or the intermediate position. The inclination angle of the first area A1 is approximately 0 degrees, which is smaller than 45 degrees, which is the inclination angle of the guide hole 10413 in the tenth embodiment.

  The second area A2 is an area extending vertically upward from the left and right direction inner end of the first area A1. The third area is an area extending from the inner side surface of the upper end portion of the second area A2 inward in the lateral direction of the main body member 12410 at an inclination angle of 45 degrees with respect to the lateral direction.

  That is, the third area A3 has a shape in which the upper end portion of the guide hole 12413 in the tenth embodiment is connected to the second area A2. The extension length of the third region A3 is about the radius of the insertion shaft portion 10421c.

  The case where the main body member 12410 of the combined operation unit 12400 moves down from the retracted position (see FIG. 66) will be described. Since the inclination angle of the guide hole 12413 is shallower in the up and down direction by about 0 degree as compared with 45 degrees in the tenth embodiment in the present embodiment, the displacement of the main body member 12410 in the up and down direction is short, The swing base member 10421 can be rotated by a large angle. Thereby, the operation speed of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 can be increased, and the rendering effect by the operation of the decoration member 422 can be improved.

  Further, by the posture change quickly to the vicinity of the contact state of the swing base member 10421, the state near the posture (contact state) to be visually recognized integrally with the swing member 430 as compared with the tenth embodiment In the case where the swing member 430 rises and moves up (the upper end portion tilts backward in the direction of the paper surface in FIG. 88) while the main body member 12410 is moved downward. In addition, even if the timing of operating the swing member 430 is somewhat deviated, the possibility that the gap between the operation member 430 and the decoration member 422 is visible to the player can be reduced. That is, by disposing the decorative member 422 early in the vicinity of the contact state, it is possible to improve the freedom of the timing of operating the operation member 430.

  In addition, as compared with the tenth embodiment, the speed at which the gravity center position G10 moves in the left and right direction can be increased as the movement speed of the rocking base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 increases, and the gravity center position G10 is The period arrange | positioned at the left-right direction outer side of insertion shaft part 10421c can be lengthened. Thus, the period in which the moment of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 centering on the insertion shaft portion 10421c becomes positive in the counterclockwise direction in the front view can be extended, and the load applied to the connecting member 423 is reduced. be able to.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the swing base member 10421 receives the gravity load applied to the center of gravity G10, and the left and right direction outer side portions are downwardly directed centering on the insertion shaft portion 10421c. The moment in the direction of rotation is applied in such a manner as to move upward. At this time, an upward load is applied along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the insertion shaft portion 10421c on the connection portion (the pivot support rod 423c (see FIG. 69)) of the swing base member 10421 and the connection member 423. Be Therefore, the downward load applied to the connecting member 423 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 423 can be prevented from being broken.

  When the main body member 12410 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 87, the posture of the swing base member 10421 is maintained for a while. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88, since the pair of left and right swing base members 10421 and the decoration member 422 are abutted in the left and right direction, compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 continues to abut in the left and right direction. The impact at the time of contact can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swing base member 10421 from separating due to the impact of the contact, and it is possible to easily show the decoration member 422 integrally immediately after the contact state.

  A case where the main body member 12410 of the combined operation unit 12400 moves upward from the extended position (see FIG. 88) will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, when the main body member 12410 is disposed at the overhanging position, the insertion shaft portion 10421c is accommodated in the third area A3 of the guide hole 12413.

  Here, since the second area A2 connected to the third area A3 extends vertically downward, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c is displaced to the second region A2 side, the member supporting the insertion shaft portion 10421c from below is Nothing is lost, and the weight of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 is supported only by the connecting member 423, and the connecting member 423 may be damaged.

  According to the present embodiment, the center of gravity position G10 is disposed outward in the left-right direction relative to the insertion shaft portion 10421c, so the left insertion shaft portion of the swing base member 10421 is centered on the left insertion shaft portion 10421c. As a result, a load is caused to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, and a load is caused to rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view on the right insertion shaft portion 10421 c on the right side member. The pair of swing base members 10421 is coaxially supported at the left and right center portions, and the pair of left and right swing base members 10421 form a contact state in which they rotate relative to each other. Therefore, the gravity center position G10 of each of the left and right swing base members 10421 is disposed at a position to rotate the pair of swing base members 10421 in the direction of maintaining the contact state.

  In order to move the insertion shaft portion 10421c disposed in the third area A3 to the second area A2, it is necessary to change the posture of the pair of swing base members 10421 from the contact state to the separated state (see FIG. 86) However, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the center-of-gravity position G10 causes the dead weight to act in the direction to maintain the contact state of the pair of swing base members 10421. Thus, the insertion shaft portion 10421c can be prevented from being pushed out to the second region A2, and the swing base member 10421 can be easily supported by the main body member 12410, so that breakage of the connection member 423 can be avoided. be able to.

  When starting the main body member 12410 from the extended position, the main body member 12410 lifts the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421, and the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves from the third area A3 to the second area A2 of the guide hole 12413. It is pushed out.

  Here, according to the shape of the third region A3 of the guide hole 12413, the load for pushing the insertion shaft portion 10421c from the third region A3 to the second region A2 is the insertion shaft portion 10421c in the same region in the tenth embodiment. It is similar to the load to push out. Therefore, the load at the time of rising start does not change between the tenth embodiment and the twelfth embodiment.

  On the other hand, after the insertion shaft portion 10421c is pushed into the second region A2, the main body member 12410 can be moved upward while maintaining the arrangement of the insertion shaft portion 10421c, so the main body member 12410 after starting is raised. The driving force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) to be operated can be reduced as compared with the tenth embodiment.

  Further, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c is disposed in the second area A2, the second area A2 is extended in the vertical direction, and thus the weight of the shielding member 10420 is not loaded on the main body member 12410. The lifting operation of the main body member 12410 can be smoothly performed as compared with the case where weight is applied.

  Referring to FIGS. 86 and 87, in the present embodiment, the movement speed of main body member 12410 and swing base member 10421 when main body member 12410 moves from the state shown in FIG. 87 toward the intermediate position. explain.

  The insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 moves on a movement trajectory R12 along a circular trajectory centering on the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 69). In FIG. 87, an angle formed by this circular orbit and the first area A1 extending on a straight line is approximately 45 degrees. In addition, the main body member 12410 operates in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first area A1.

  Therefore, when the main body member 12410 ascends by the vertical distance Y12 from the state shown in FIG. 87, the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves in the horizontal direction by the horizontal distance X12, and here, the displacement in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction And the displacement of Y are approximately the same (Y12.apprxeq.X12).

  In other words, when the main body member 12410 is moved up to the intermediate position, the displacement amount of the upward displacement of the main body member 12410 and the displacement amount of the upward displacement of the insertion shaft portion 10421c become the same, and further, the displacement amount and the insertion shaft portion The displacement amount of 10421c in the left-right direction is the same.

  That is, since the rising speed of the main body member 12410 and the operation speed in the left-right direction of the insertion shaft portion 10421c can be made the same, the sense of unity of the operation of the main body member 12410, the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 is produced can do.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the gap is formed by swinging the pair of decorative members 422 of the combined operation unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the decorative member 422 may be guided slidably in the left-right direction, and the pair of decorative members 422 may slide in directions away from each other to form a gap for housing the swing member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be secured in the vertical direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the movable upper lid member 332 of the lower panel unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a long plate-shaped movable member is supported pivotably supported on the inner side surfaces of a pair of step portions 324a and formed by a left and right pair, and the movable member has a direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are provided in a row In a closed position that prevents the passage of the ball to the specified winning opening 65a, and the opening that allows the passage of the ball to the specified winning opening 65a by swinging upward or downward from that state It may be possible to form a state. Moreover, you may comprise not the specific winning a prize opening 65a but the 2nd prize winning opening 640 by the same structure.

  Although the case where the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331 c is reflected to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 of the lower panel unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in an extended state, a portion that reflects light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331 c to the front side may be formed in the lower part of the movable upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the movable top member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light rendering effect can be improved.

  Although the case where the alignment part 543 is united by concavo-convex fitting to the moving member 540 of the rocking operation unit 500 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a magnet may be disposed at a position where the pair of moving members 540 are disposed close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be united by a magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force, and it becomes unnecessary to generate the holding force by the driving device 550 when the moving members 540 are disposed at the extended position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 550 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the guide hole 413 of the combined operation unit 400 is formed in a linear shape has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, it is possible to make the swinging speed of the shielding member 420 moderate.

  Although the case where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 is swung has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides in a direction away from the main body member 410, and the decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

  In the above-described embodiments, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 of the combined operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the guide arms of the wire guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 necessary to accommodate the wiring guide arm 480 outside the opening 211 a can be narrowed. Thereby, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be enlarged.

  Although the case where the moving member 540 is supported by the pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by a plurality of three or more arm members. In this case, for example, the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate arm members, and disposed so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, thereby suppressing the positional deviation between the arm members. Can be improved. That is, when one of the arm members at both ends pushes one end of the bridging member 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridging member 528, 2528, 7528 bends, the other end is the other It moves toward the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. In this manner, the arm members at both ends work to suppress the bending of the bridging members 528, 2528, and 7528. As a result, the positional deviation of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed, and the posture of the moving member 540 is stabilized. It can be done.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 has a cylindrical portion (for example, one side support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion (for example, the one side support portion 482b). For example, although the case where it was pivotally supported by other side cylindrical part 481c was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the portion supporting the cylindrical portion may be formed by an elongated hole extending in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to expansion and contraction in the vertical direction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, expansion and contraction in the lateral direction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide in the extension direction of the long hole can be performed.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm 481 a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) configuring the wiring guide arm 480 Although the case in which the width is shorter than the upper side surface (for example, the additional portion 9481d) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower side surface (e.g., the plate-like arm portion 481a) of each arm member (e.g., the first guide arm 481) may be longer than the upper side surface (e.g., the overhang portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to suppress that the wiring W slips down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm portion 481a) by gravity.

  In the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the additional portions 481 d and 9481 d has been described in the first to fifth embodiments, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481 f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the widths of the plate-like arm portion 481 a and the overhang portions 481 d and 9481 d. In this case, since part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendages 481d and 9481d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching (taking it with a finger) the protruding portion. Thus, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  In the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment of the first to fifth embodiments, the case where the widths of the overhang portions 481 d and 9481 d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the portions other than the portions to which the front locking portions 481f of the additional portions 481d and 9481d are fixed may be formed to have the same width as the plate-like arm portions 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than that of the plate-like arm 481 a, part of the wiring W can be protruded from the plate-like arm 481 a and the overhangs 481 d and 9481 d. Therefore, the wire W can be easily taken out by pinching (thumbing with a finger) the protruding portion. Thus, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper side of the guide hole 4424b may be thicker than the thickness of the lower side. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made greater than the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423, so The bounce of the connecting member 423 which occurs when moving to the rear can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the lower end of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410 may be formed with a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e. In this case, when the insertion shaft 421c is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied from the side surface of the guide hole 413 to the insertion shaft 421c can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction change portion 8013 c is disposed only at the extended end of the light projection path 8013 b has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a direction change unit 8013c may be additionally provided in the middle of the light projection path 8013b. In this case, the light reflected to the front side from the direction change portion 8013c disposed in the middle of the light projection path 8013b and the light transmitted through the direction change portion 8013c are disposed at the extended end of the light projection path 8013b The light can be divided into light reflected from the direction change unit 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights visually recognized in front view can be increased relative to the number of the light emitting devices 8610. Thus, the number of light irradiation devices 8610 can be reduced while maintaining the rendering effect of the light irradiation devices 8610.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the pair of transmission convex portions 723 are disposed on the disk member 720 of the two-direction operation unit 700 and the transmission convex portions 723 in contact with the operation member 750 interchange on the way is described. It is not limited to this. For example, the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 is formed under the condition that the formation of one transmission protrusion 723 is omitted among the pair of transmission protrusions 723 and only one transmission protrusion 723 contacts the operation member 750. A support member may be provided to maintain the contact member 753 above the rotation shaft 722 of the disk member 720 by supporting the support member from the lower side. In this case, when the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed above the rotation shaft 722, the contact member 753 and the transmission convex portion 723 abut, and the transmission convex portion 723 is disposed below the rotation shaft 722 The abutment member 753 is prevented from falling on the support member (stops in place). Thereby, when the operation member 750 is moved by the transmission convex portion 723, it is possible to suppress a change in the operation speed of the operation member 750, and even when the operation member 750 is prevented from falling on the support member and stopped. Since the operating speed is 0, changes in the operating speed can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the transmission convex part 723 of the two-way operation unit 700 abuts only from the lower side of the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the transmission convex portion 723 is not a pair but a single convex portion, and the contact member 753 is a long hole accommodating the transmission convex portion 723, and the upper side surface and the lower side surface of the long hole. In the case where the transmission convex portion 723 moves above the rotation shaft 722, contacts the upper side surface, and the transmission convex portion 723 moves below the rotation shaft 722 The natural length of the coil spring CS10 may be set so as to abut on the lower side surface. In this case, of the side surfaces of the contact member 753, the upper side surface is shaped to suppress the speed fluctuation when the transmission convex portion 723 moves above the rotation shaft 722, while the lower side surface is a transmission convex Since the portion 723 can be shaped to suppress fluctuations in speed when moving below the rotation shaft 722, changes in the operating speed of the operation member 750 are made throughout one rotation of the disc member 720. It can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the operation member 750 slides along the linear direction has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating member 750 may operate along a curve. In this case, the operation mode of the operation member 750 can be diversified, and the types of effects can be increased.

  Although the case where the transmission convex part 723 is comprised by a pair was demonstrated in the said 10th Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, three or more (for example, three) transmission projections 723 may be provided. In this case, compared to the case where the transmission convex portion 723 is configured as a pair, the reciprocating motion speed of the operation member 750 in the case of rotating the disk member 720 at the same speed can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the swing base member 10421 is tilted and the swing base member 10421 is separated from the main body member 10410 by disposing the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400 at the intermediate position has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing base member 10421 is pressed against the main body member 10410 by a spring or the like in the state where the main body member 10410 is disposed at the retracted position, and the degree of pressing is performed while the main body member 10410 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position The load may be relieved, and the pressing load may be released in a state in which the main body member 10410 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this case, the swing base member 10421 is a main body member due to the pressing load, even when vibration is generated due to the game machine being hit or the like while the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position. It is possible to prevent leaving from 10410.

  Although the case where the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400 moves up and down has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body member 10410 may move in the left-right direction. In this case, the influence of gravity applied to the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 can be reduced.

  Although the case where the connection members 423 do not abut each other at the intersection portion has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the main body member 10410 is disposed at an intermediate position and the connecting members 423 intersect in a front view, they may contact each other in the front and back. In this case, as the connecting members 423 abut each other and rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, the swing base member 10421 rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction. One swing base member 10421 can be separated from the main body member 10410, and the other swing base member 10421 can be pressed against the main body member 10410. As a result, it is possible to cause the swing base member 10421 to produce an effect of uneven left and right.

  The tenth embodiment described the case where the swing base member 10421 is moved by being suspended from the connecting member 423 while the main body member 10410 is moving, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rocking base member 10421 may be moved by the collision means supported by the rear case 210 and projected toward the rocking base member 10421 at the operation timing of the rocking base member 10421 and colliding. In this case, since the moving speed of the swing base member 10421 depends on the operating speed of the collision means, it is possible to cause the swing base member 10421 to produce an effect unrelated to the operating speed of the main body member 10410. In this case, if the impact when the collision means collides with the rocking base member 10421 is excessive, it affects the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the impact at the time of the collision with a member having a high cushioning property.

  In the tenth embodiment, the barycentric position G10 of the “one member of the shielding member 10420” is reversed to the left and right with the insertion shaft portion 10421c during the movement of the main body member 10410. It is not limited. For example, the center of gravity position G10 may be maintained at one side of the insertion shaft portion 10421c.

  Although the eleventh embodiment has described the case where the swing base member 10421 moves relative to the main body member 10410 on the plane parallel to the moving plane of the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the swing base member 10421 may move relative to the main body member 10410 on the plane intersecting the moving plane of the main body member 10410. In this case, three-dimensional effects can be performed. In the tenth embodiment, as an example, the main body member 10410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the upper and lower plane by the inclined surface 10447 of the holding and fixing portion 446, and the swing base member 10421 is the main body on the inclined surface 10447. Relative movement with respect to member 10410 is described.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by devising the shape of the contact member 11753 of the operation member 11750 of the two-direction operation unit 11700, the operation member 11750 can be linearly slid at an equal speed while rotating the disk member 720 at an equal speed. Although the case where it is made to carry out was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the operation member 11750 may be slid with a timing belt rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 741. In this case, the operation member 11750 can slide at a constant speed without forming a complicated shape in a part of the operation member 11750.

  Although the case where the guide hole 11413 is configured as the through hole is described in the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 11413 may be configured by a hole with a bottom, and the bottom portion may be configured to protrude to the front side as it goes to the left and right center of the main body member 11410. In this case, the space portion of the main body member 11410 can be reduced, and the durability of the main body member 11410 can be improved.

  Moreover, since the possibility that the insertion shaft portion 11421c is displaced in the axial direction can be reduced compared to the case of axially supporting the long hole, the degree of freedom of the shape of the connecting portion of the insertion shaft portion 11421c with the guide hole 11413 can be reduced. It can be improved. For example, the shape of the connecting portion of the insertion shaft portion 11421c with the guide hole 11413 is spherical, and the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member supported by the insertion shaft portion 11421c by connecting in a manner like a ball joint The degree of freedom of the posture 422 can be improved.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<An example of the technical idea in which the moving member is accommodated between the member that moves forward and the base member>
A first moving member formed so as to be movable between a retracted position formed outward of the liquid crystal display device and an extended position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and relative movement with the first moving member And a second moving member disposed on the front side of the first moving member, wherein the first moving member forms an overlapping portion overlapping the second moving member in a front view, In the gaming machine in which the area of the overlapping portion is larger in the case where the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position as compared with the case where the first moving member is disposed at the overhang position, the first moving member An auxiliary member disposed on the side and movable in a direction approaching and separating from the first moving member, the first moving member in a state where the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position Of the second moving member between the second member and the auxiliary member Gaming machine A1, wherein is that the.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members are disposed back and forth, and in the retracted position, the overlapping portion to be overlapped is formed large and the area visually recognized in front view of the plurality of moving members is reduced. At the outlet position, there is a gaming machine in which a large effect area is secured by forming the overlapping portion smaller than the retraction position (see, for example, JP-A-2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to avoid interference between the moving member on the front side and the moving member on the back side, the overlapping portion at the retracted position of the moving member on the back side is formed particularly flat. Therefore, the effect of the moving member on the back side at the overhanging position is limited to a planar one, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Here, as a method for solving that the effect is limited to a planar one, for example, a method is conceivable in which the moving member on the front side is three-dimensionally formed toward the front side. However, in this case, since the space on the front side of the moving member on the front side is limited, it is not possible to form an anteroposterior difference enough to form the moving member on the back side in three dimensions.

  In addition, as a method of solving that the effect is limited to planar ones, for example, a portion not overlapping with the moving member on the front side is made on the moving member on the back side, and the moving member on the back side A method is conceivable in which a member moving toward the direction approaching or separating away is provided. However, in this case, the portion of the moving member on the back side provided as a portion not overlapping the moving member on the front side protrudes outward of the moving member on the front side when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. As a result, it becomes difficult to narrow the arrangement space when the moving member on the front side and the moving member on the back side are arranged at the retracted position, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for arranging the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary member is disposed on the front side of the first moving member and is formed movable in the direction approaching and separating from the first moving member, and the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position The second moving member can be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member in the above state. Therefore, the interference between the auxiliary member and the second moving member disposed on the first moving member can be avoided, and the arrangement space of these members can be narrowed, and the auxiliary member is disposed on the front side of the second moving member. Compared with setting, a three-dimensional effect can be performed using a wide front and rear space.

  Further, in the extended state where the second moving member is not accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the auxiliary member is disposed in the vicinity of the first moving member, so that the space between the first moving member and the auxiliary member Thus, it is possible to suppress the dead space of the secondary member and to easily arrange other members on the front side of the auxiliary member.

  The mode of movement of the auxiliary member is not particularly limited, and a mode in which the moving direction is formed by a single axis such as slide movement, a mode in which a rotation axis is defined and rotated around the rotation axis, or a combination thereof good.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first moving member includes a first supporting portion for supporting the auxiliary member, and the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position to move the second supporting portion. An end opposite to the end where the member starts being accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member is supported, and a driving force is applied to a point near the first supporting portion with the first supporting portion as a fulcrum. A game machine A2 characterized in that an end portion of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side moves in a direction toward and away from the first moving member by being operated and swinging the auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the end of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side is separated from the first moving member by the swinging operation of the auxiliary member with the first support as a fulcrum. Thus, a space for accommodating the second moving member is formed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member.

  Here, in the first support portion, the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position, and swings the end opposite to the end where the second moving member starts being accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Support movable. Therefore, even if the amount of movement of the first support portion of the auxiliary member is small, the amount of movement of the end portion of the auxiliary member on which the second moving member is accommodated can be increased.

  In this case, by driving the driving force to a point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member and swinging the auxiliary member, the second moving member is compared with the driving distance of the point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member. The end portion of the auxiliary member on the side for housing the second moving member can be largely separated from the first moving member.

  Therefore, it can suppress that a 2nd moving member and an auxiliary member contact | abut. That is, coexistence with suppression of the drive distance of an auxiliary member, and contact | abutting prevention with a 2nd moving member and an auxiliary member can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine A2, on the side of the second moving member facing the auxiliary member, the end closer to the first supporting portion is the side away from the first supporting portion. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is disposed closer to the first moving member compared to the end.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, it approaches the first supporting portion of the second moving member It starts to be accommodated from the side end, that is, the end arranged close to the first moving member. Therefore, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the space between the second moving member and the auxiliary member can be secured. Therefore, it can suppress that a 2nd movement member collides with a 1st movement member or an auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machines A2 and A3, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members movably supported by a second support portion formed at an end portion on the side away from the auxiliary member, and the pair of first moving members Each of the two moving members is formed so as to be movable in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and at least a part of the auxiliary member can be accommodated between the pair of second moving members by its movement operation. A game machine A4 characterized by.

  Here, for example, when the mechanical unit for swinging the auxiliary member is disposed on the front side of the first moving member, the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member is expanded (first In order to move the first moving member and the second moving member in the moving direction of the moving member, it is conceivable to arrange the second moving member on the front side of the mechanism. On the other hand, in this case, the auxiliary member for accommodating the second moving member needs to be moved to the front side (the direction away from the first moving member), so the space on the front side of the auxiliary member is suppressed. It becomes difficult to form three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 and A3, at least a part of the auxiliary member is accommodated in the space generated by the pair of second moving members being separated from each other. Can. As a result, for example, it becomes unnecessary to move the second moving member to the front side of the mechanism portion of the auxiliary member in order to widen the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. It can be arranged close to the first moving member. Thereby, the auxiliary member can be formed three-dimensionally on the front side.

  A game machine A5 according to any one of game machines A2 to A4, wherein the first support portion is disposed on the side of the auxiliary member close to the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is disposed on the side closer to the liquid crystal display device of the auxiliary member. In this case, the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position and the auxiliary member is pivoted in the direction away from the first moving member, so that the display surface formed on the auxiliary member is inward of the liquid crystal display device (game Side). As a result, when the first moving member is moved to the retracted position, the display surface of the auxiliary member can be directed to the player side, and the effect of the auxiliary member can be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of increasing the distance between the first support portion and the end portion on the side where the first movable member and the second movable member of the auxiliary member start to be accommodated, and for the purpose of turning the display surface of the auxiliary member toward the player. It can be shared.

<An example of a technical idea that suppresses the bounce of the moving member>
A first movable member movably formed, a base member on which the first movable member is relatively movable, and a second movable member one end of which is guidably coupled to the first movable member And a connecting member of which one end is supported at the other end of the second moving member and whose other end is guidably connected to the base member, and a driving force for moving the first moving member. A driving device for generating the second moving member and the connecting member by the movement of the first moving member, and one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member When one end reaches the end position of the guided range, one end of the second moving member or the other end of the other end of the connecting member is the other end of the second moving member. And at a support point of the one end of the connection member Gaming machine B1, characterized in that guided in the direction including the dynamic direction of the vertical component.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first moving member, a second moving member which is guidably connected to one end of the first moving member, and a second moving member at the other end of the second moving member. And a drive device for driving the first moving member, the second moving member and the connection being supported by the movement of the first moving member. There is a gaming machine arranged at different timings at end positions of a range in which the member is moved and one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member are guided (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008- See, e.g. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the first moving member is moved, the end of the movable range is first reached among the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member. When the end reaches the end position of the movable range, the support point of the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member bounces in the direction opposite to the moving direction to that point. In this case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the second moving member and the connecting member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position of the guided range, the second moving member The other end of one end or the other end of the connecting member is guided in a direction including the vertical component of the moving direction of the support point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member Ru. Thereby, the direction in which the support point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member bounces back, and the guiding direction of the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member Crossing causes resistance to the second moving member or the connecting member. Due to this resistance, it is possible to prevent the support point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member from bouncing back. Therefore, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  The connecting member and the second moving member may be fixed at a point at which they are supported by each other. That is, the connecting member and the second moving member may be integrally handled.

  In the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path for guiding the other end of the connection member, and the guide path is such that the other end of the connection member is at least one of the guide paths of the base member. Reaching the end position of the rear end of the connection member, and suppressing the movement of the other end of the connection member along the guide path on the side surface that receives the other end of the connection member when the support point bounces. A game machine B2 comprising a section.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guiding path for guiding the other end of the connecting member. The guide path is connected to the other side of the connecting member on the side receiving the other end of the connecting member when the other end of the connecting member reaches at least one end position of the guiding direction of the base member and the support point bounces. A braking portion is provided which suppresses movement of the other end of the member along the guide path.

  Therefore, the other end of the connecting member guides the base member while suppressing the resistance of movement of the connecting member in the guiding direction until the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position of the base member in the guiding direction. After reaching the end position of the direction, it is possible to create the effect of braking the other end of the connecting member.

  In addition, as a damping | braking part formed in the side of a guide route, the concave part which can partially accommodate the other end of a connection member, the high friction part which made the frictional resistance increase by embossing, and a spring member The spring part etc. by which elastic force is loaded by is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members arranged in parallel in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point, and the one end of the second moving member is guided The game machine B3 characterized in that the direction of the direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the moving direction is the direction opposite to each other between the pair of second moving members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the direction of the direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the guiding direction of one end of the second moving member is a pair The second moving members are formed in mutually opposite directions. Therefore, as one end of the pair of second moving members is guided and moved by the first moving member, the other end of the second moving member is loaded along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point. Power is offset. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the other end of the second moving member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point during the movement of the first moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member is provided with a pair of guiding paths for guiding the other end of the connecting member, and the connecting member is guided by the other guiding path at the other end. And the other end of the connecting member extends along the guide path when the other end of the connection member reaches the end position of the guide path. Of the bounceable directions, direction components perpendicular to the movement direction of the support point are opposite to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the other end of the pair of connecting members respectively reach the end position of the guide path of the base member, the other of the connecting members Of the directions in which the end portions of the support point can bounce along the guiding path, the direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point are opposite to each other.

  In this case, the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the end position of the guide path of the base member, and the supporting point of the pair of connecting members with the second moving member is in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction to that point When moving (displacement), either one of the pair of connecting members is pressed against the end of the guide path of the base member, and the movement resistance of the pair of connecting members increases. Therefore, movement (displacement) of the support point between the second moving member and the pair of connecting members in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction is suppressed. Thereby, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B4, an intermediate portion formed between the one end and the other end of the pair of connection members is the one end and the other end of the connection member. A game machine B5 that is disposed on the side away from the second moving member as compared to a straight line connecting the two.

  Here, for example, when the connecting member is formed of a linear plate-like member, one of the connecting members is disposed when the pair of connecting members are disposed at the end position on the side projecting toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device. When the end portion of the second moving member is moved, the distance between the connecting member and the second moving member may be narrowed, and the connecting member may abut on the second moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4, the middle portion of the connecting member is second compared to the straight line connecting one end and the other end of the pair of connecting members. It is disposed on the side away from the moving member.

  Therefore, even when one end of the connecting member is moved, the connecting member and the second connecting member may be moved even if the one end of the connecting member is moved when the pair of connecting members is disposed at the end position of the movable range on the side projecting toward the inside A sufficient distance from the moving member can be secured, and the connection member can be prevented from coming into contact with the second moving member. Therefore, the design freedom of the second moving member can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members, and the one end of the second moving member is disposed to at least one end position of the guiding direction. Thus, the pair of second moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the one end of the pair of second moving members is disposed at the end position of at least one in the guiding direction. The second moving member is abutted. Therefore, the positional deviation of one of the pair of second moving members can be corrected by the contact with the other second moving member. That is, since the relationship in which the pair of second moving members correct each other for positional deviation is formed, the arrangement of the second moving members can be stabilized.

<An example of the technical idea in which the wiring is disposed along the movable member>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movable and a wire connected to the movable member, one end is connected to the movable member and the other end is outside the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine C1 comprising a wiring auxiliary member connected to the rear case and formed to be expandable and contractable, wherein the wiring is disposed along the wiring auxiliary member.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring is disposed without support from the rear case to the moving member (see, for example, JP-A-2011-245160). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the moving member moves, the wiring has an unexpected arrangement, and for example, the wiring is rubbed with another member or the wiring is pinched by the other member. There is a problem that there is a risk that the sex may fall.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the wiring is disposed along the wiring auxiliary member connecting the rear case and the moving member, the arrangement of the wiring can be predicted and the wiring can be made with other members. It is possible to prevent rubbing and pinching of the wiring by other members. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect of expansion and contraction, in the case of expansion and contraction in a foldable manner, in the case of expansion and contraction in a sliding manner, and the case of expansion and contraction with bellows, etc. are exemplified.

  Moreover, a round wire-like wiring, a flat harness, etc. are illustrated as wiring. The flat harness has an advantage of being easy to set so as to bend around a certain axis as compared with the round wire shape wiring.

  In the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm members are a long rod-like connecting rod portion and a short side of the connecting rod portion at least one end of the connecting rod portion. And a support portion formed in a columnar or cylindrical shape provided with a shaft in a direction to rotatably support the arm members, and the wiring is disposed in a manner to surround the support portion. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member is formed of a plurality of arm members rotatably supported by the supporting portion formed at the end, and the wiring is the supporting portion It is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent at an acute angle by rotation of the arm members.

  In the gaming machine C2, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, the pair of side wall portions are vertically disposed, and are formed below the pair of side wall portions. The width of the side wall to be made is longer than the width of the side wall formed on the upper side, and the width of at least one side wall is made shorter than the width dimension of the wiring. .

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to easily attach and detach the wiring at the time of manufacture and repair of the gaming machine.

  Here, in order to make it easy to attach and detach the wiring from the arm member, it is effective to make the width of the pair of side wall portions of the arm member equal to or less than the width dimension of the wiring member and to project the wiring member from the arm member. . However, if the width of the side wall portion is too short, the wiring may fall off the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, at least one side wall is shorter than the width of the wiring, and the width of the side wall formed below is longer than the width of the side wall formed above It is formed. Thereby, the area of the side wall portion of the arm member supporting the wire pressed downward by gravity is secured, and the wire can be easily attached to and removed from the arm member while preventing the wire from falling off the arm member. .

  In the gaming machine C3, the plurality of arm members have a bottom portion connecting one end of the pair of side wall portions in the short direction, and the wiring is a concave cross-sectional portion formed by the bottom portion and the side wall portion The support portion is provided with a lid member disposed at the end opposite to the bottom portion, and the lid member is disposed at least from the support portion to be opposed to the support portion to support the wiring A game machine C4 extending toward the side wall portion sandwiched therebetween to a position overlapping the wiring.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the arm member forms a concave cross section by the pair of side wall portions and the bottom portion, the wiring is accommodated in the concave cross section portion, and the lid member is disposed at the tip portion on the opposite side to the bottom portion of the support portion. Be done. The lid member extends from at least the support portion toward a side wall portion disposed opposite to the support portion and sandwiching the wiring with the support portion to a position overlapping the wiring. As a result, even if the wire is about to come off from the pair of side wall portions, the lid member is caught by the wire.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C 3, the arm members are pivoted to bend the wiring in the axial diameter direction of the pivoting axis and the wiring is easily displaced. The lid member can prevent the wire from falling off the arm member.

  Further, by arranging the lid member on the support portion on which the pair of arm members are supported each other, the number of lid members can be reduced. That is, when forming a cover member in the middle of the arm members, it is necessary to form a cover member on each of the pair of arm members, and the number of cover members must be equal to the number of arm members. On the other hand, by disposing the lid member on the support portion, the number of disposed lid members can be reduced by one from the number of the plurality of connected arm members.

  In the gaming machine C4, the lengths in the longitudinal direction of the arm members disposed adjacent to each other are formed to be different from the lengths of the lid members formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm members. A game machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the lengths of the adjacent arm members are different than the lengths of the lid members formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the lid members fixed to the support portions of the arm members disposed adjacent to each other can be shifted in the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, when adjacent arm members are disposed close to each other, interference between the lid members can be suppressed. In this case, coexistence of disposing the arm member in a space-saving manner and preventing the dropping of the wiring can be achieved by enlarging the lid member.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the arm member extends from the connecting rod side to the shaft bottom extending beyond the support in the longitudinal direction of the bottom, and around the support. A wall portion formed in a wall shape, wherein the arm members are pivotally supported by each other in the support portion, and the axial bottom portion is in a rotational direction in which the arm members pivotally supported each other are separated When arranged in the end position, the arm members are formed so as to be contactable in the rotational direction of the arm members, and the wall portions are arranged at the end positions in the rotational direction in which the arm members pivotally supported to each other are separated from each other A gaming machine C6 characterized by forming a gap in the turning direction of the arm member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the arm members are pivotally supported by each other in the support portion, and the shaft bottom portion extended from the connecting rod portion side along the lengthwise direction of the bottom portion passes the support portion It is formed. Therefore, the shaft bottom portion of the support portion is abutted at the end position of the pivoting direction in which the arm members pivotally supported to move away from each other, so that the arm members are rotated beyond the state in which the arm members are arranged in a straight line. Is prevented.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the pivoting angle of the arm member is defined, and the wire is restricted from bending in the reverse direction. Can be prevented.

  At the end position in the rotational direction in which the arm members are separated from each other, a gap is formed in the rotational direction in the wall, so that even if the wire bends and approaches the wall, the wire is pinched by the wall It is possible to prevent disconnection.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, rotational friction generated in the support portion in the vicinity of the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member is suppressed as compared with rotational friction generated in the support portion in the extended state of the auxiliary member. A game machine C7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the supporting portion in the vicinity of the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is generated in the supporting portion in the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Since it is suppressed compared to friction, when the moving member moves in a mode of deforming the wiring auxiliary member from the reduced state to the extended state, the resistance generated on the support can be suppressed, and the movement of the moving member The driving force required for the

  In addition, when the moving auxiliary member moves at high speed and the wiring auxiliary member approaches an extended state, the rotational friction at the support portion is increased, whereby the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member can be reduced. Thus, the wiring auxiliary member can be extended while the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member is high, and bending of the pair of arm members to the opposite side can be suppressed by force.

  In addition, as a method of changing the rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, a recess or a hole for partially preventing mutual contact is provided on the sliding surface of the support column and the cylinder. And the method to change the area which the hollow and the hole formed in a pipe | tube overlap in a sliding face with the state of a wiring auxiliary member is illustrated. In this case, it is possible to suppress the rotational friction as the area in which the depressions and holes formed in the columns and cylinders of the support portion overlap on the sliding surface is smaller (the contact area between the columns and the cylinder as the depressions and holes overlap). Becomes larger and rotational friction increases).

  Here, for example, in the case where the hollows are formed in the cylinder and the column for half a circumference, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column completely overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the column in the remaining half circumference. On the other hand, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column do not overlap, the hollow is formed over the entire periphery of the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction is suppressed over the entire periphery. In addition, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column partially overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the column in a region narrower than a half circumference. Thus, the rotational friction between the cylinder and the column can be changed by changing the formation range of the depression on the sliding surface.

  Further, instead of the depressions and the holes, a method of partially forming a textured surface by spraying a powder on a sliding surface is exemplified. Since a plurality of powders are dispersed and arranged on the surface to form an irregular surface, the rotational friction can be increased as the area of the pear ground is larger on the sliding surface. The smaller the overlapping area of the pear ground formed on the column and the cylinder, the larger the total area of the pear ground that acts on rotational friction on the sliding surface, so the rotary friction between the column and the cylinder can be increased.

  Further, a method of sticking a tape having a low coefficient of friction instead of the depressions or holes is exemplified. In the sliding surface, the smaller the overlapping area of the tape stuck to the pillars of the support portion and the cylinder, the larger the total area effective for the rotational friction of the tape stuck on the sliding surface. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape includes a first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the cylindrically formed support portion forms an inner peripheral side surface A second non-contact portion in which the first and second non-contact portions are partially overlapped in the radial direction in a state in which the arm members are supported. A game machine C8 characterized in that the overlapping area is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the stretched state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Here, in order to change rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, for example, when forming embossing on the support portion, the surface shape is smoothed by friction due to rotation of the support portion (planar And there is a problem with durability. In addition, for example, in the case where a tape with low friction is attached, there is a risk that the tape may be peeled off by the rotation of the support portion, and there is a problem in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the columnar support portion is provided with a first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side is partially omitted, The formed support includes a second non-contact portion where the formation of the inner circumferential side is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion do not contact each other. The area in which the first noncontact portion and the second noncontact portion overlap in the radial direction is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the stretched state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the rotational friction generated in the supporting portion in the vicinity of the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is compared with the rotational friction generated in the supporting portion in the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  The first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion can be easily manufactured to have the same shape by manufacturing the mold, so that the rotational friction of the support portion is changed according to the state of the wiring auxiliary member. It can be easily achieved.

  In addition, as the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion, a recess formed on the sliding surface of the support portion, a hole formed on the sliding surface of the support portion, and the like are exemplified.

  Each of the gaming machines C2 to C8 includes a front locking member detachably fixed to the connecting rod, and the connecting rod is formed of a pair of side walls arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, the front A locking member is detachably fixed to a short side end of one of the side walls, and is formed so as to project toward the other of the side walls.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, and one of the pair of side wall portions And a front locking member detachably fixed to the short end of the side wall and formed so as to project toward the other side wall with the flow.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the wire is prevented from dropping off from the connecting bar at the time of mounting the front locking portion, and the wire is connected to the connecting bar at the time of removal. It can be made easy to pull out from.

  Thereby, the front locking portion is attached at the time of operation of the moving member to prevent the wire from falling off, and at the time of stopping the moving member (for example, at the time of maintenance) be able to.

  In the gaming machine C9, the front locking member includes an arm formed by at least a pair, and when the front locking member is fixed to the one side wall, the one side wall is the pair. A gaming machine C10 having a fitting recess which is held by an arm and the one side wall is formed as a recess into which the arm can be fitted.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, one of the side wall portions is held by the arm portion of the front locking member, and the arm portion is fitted into the fitting recess at that time. It can suppress that a member slides in the longitudinal direction of one side wall part. Thereby, position shift with respect to the side wall part of a front surface locking member can be prevented.

  As a method of preventing the front locking member from coming off the side wall, the arm of the front locking member is extended beyond the length of the side wall in the width direction, and is disposed oppositely at the extended end thereof. For example, a method is provided that includes a protrusion provided so as to protrude toward the arm, and the removal is prevented by hooking the protrusion on the side wall. In addition, a hook-shaped retaining part is formed which presses the front locking member from the side wall in the direction opposite to the pulling-out direction, and the locking part is hooked on the front locking member. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C10, the pair of arm portions is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the fitting recess is formed as a recess extending in a semicircular shape in cross section.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the arm is formed in a cylindrical shape and the fitting recess is formed in a semicircular cross section, so that one side wall is held between the pair of arms When the arm is fitted into the fitting recess, the center of the arm is brought close to the center of the fitting recess, which facilitates positioning when attaching the front locking member to one of the side walls. , The time required for mounting can be shortened.

  In any one of the game machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes a positional deviation suppressing portion which suppresses positional deviation of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes the positional deviation suppressing portion which suppresses positional deviation along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member of the wiring. It is possible to suppress the wiring from rubbing against the wiring auxiliary member and from being worn.

  In addition, as a positional deviation suppression part, when the connection rod part of a wiring auxiliary member sandwiches wiring by a pair of wall part, for example, the hollow formed in the side surface opposingly arranged by wiring is illustrated. In this case, for example, the pair of connecting rod portions are rotated in the direction in which they are mutually opened by the support portion, and the distance between the end portions on the supporting portion side of the pair of connecting rod portions By leaving the length of the wiring which wraps around, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. That is, the wiring can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member by being able to be accommodated in the depression formed on the side surface facing the wiring and absorbing the excessive amount of the length of the wiring that goes around the support portion. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as the misalignment suppression portion, for example, when the connection rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wire between the pair of wall portions, the gap formed by the facing side surfaces of the pair of wall portions and the wire is pinched A portion formed in a bent shape is illustrated. For example, the case where the clearance gap in which wiring is inserted is formed in S character shape, or is formed in a rectangular wave shape, and a square shape is illustrated.

  In this case, as compared with the case where the gap formed by the pair of wall portions is formed in a straight line, when the wire moves in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions, the inner side surface of the pair of wall portions and the wire Since the number of contact points can be increased, the resistance applied to the wiring can be increased. Therefore, the wiring can be suppressed from moving in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions.

  Also, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the gap between the pair of wall portions is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring in the vicinity of the support portion. The part to be In this case, for example, even when the wiring is moved in the radial direction of the supporting portion when the wiring auxiliary member is rotated by the supporting portion, the distance between the pair of wall portions in the vicinity of the supporting portion is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring. Thus, the wiring can be held between the pair of wall portions in the vicinity of the support portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the wiring at the middle portion of the wiring auxiliary member.

  Further, as the positional deviation suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, a portion protruding from the inner side surface of one wall portion is exemplified. In this case, it is possible to increase the resistance between the wire and the connecting rod portion by hooking the portion to be overhanged onto the wire, and it is possible to suppress the wire from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wire auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion projects from the one side wall portion toward the other side wall portion A game machine C13 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is from the one side wall portion to the other Since the protruding portions are formed toward the side wall portions, the portions where the wires are caught can be formed on the inner side surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, and positional deviation of the wires in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portion, and are alternately formed on a pair of the side wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portions and are alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions. The wiring can be easily hooked to the positional deviation suppressing part as compared with the case where the positional deviation suppressing part is formed.

  In the gaming machine C13 or C14, the distance between the positional deviation suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the positional deviation suppressing portion elastically deforms in a direction away from the other side wall portion A game machine C15 characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13 or C14, the distance between the positional deviation suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the positional deviation suppressing portion separates from the other side wall portion In the case where the wiring is inserted between the displacement suppressing portion and the other side wall portion, the displacement restraining portion is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force causes the wiring to be a side wall portion. It can be held between the displacement suppression portion. As a result, the wiring can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C12 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the lengthwise direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is provided near the support portion of the pair of side wall portions. A game machine C16 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the long direction, and the supporting portions of the pair of side wall portions In the vicinity, a positional deviation suppressor is formed.

  In this case, since the wiring disposed around the support portion is suppressed from being displaced in the vicinity of the support portion which is particularly likely to be misaligned when the pair of connecting rod portions rotate, the wires can extend in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress displacement along the line.

  In addition, you may form a misregistration suppression part by widening the formation space | interval of a pair of side wall part in support part vicinity. The wiring can be curved at the portion where the formation distance between the pair of side wall portions is expanded. Therefore, when the pair of connecting rod portions rotates, the wiring sags in the vicinity of the support portion, and accordingly, even if the wiring is likely to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, the wiring is curved at the displacement suppressing portion Thus, it is possible to absorb the amount of slack in the vicinity of the support. Thus, the wiring can be prevented from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pair of side wall portions, and the wear of the wiring can be suppressed, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines C2 to C16, the one arm member out of the pair of arm members supported by each other extends toward the other arm member and the axial direction of the support portion A game machine C17, comprising: an extending portion overlapping the other arm member, wherein the extending portion is formed so as to be able to abut in the axial direction of the other arm member and the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine C17, the extending portion extending from one arm member to the other arm member overlaps the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion, and the other in the axial direction of the support portion It is formed to be able to abut on the arm member.

  In this case, when the one arm member is twisted in the direction in which the extension portion approaches the other arm member, the extension portion abuts on the other arm member, and the deformation resistance of the one arm member is increased.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C16, one arm member is deformed in such a manner as to twist in a direction in which the extending portion approaches the other arm member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring disposed along the arm member. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be secured.

<An example of a technical idea for preventing positional deviation of a pair of arms of a member rotating with parallel links>
A base plate, a pair of arm members pivotally supported at one end thereof to the base plate, and the other ends of the pair of arm members being parallel to the axial support direction of the one end A movable member pivotally supported by a shaft and movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a driving force of the movable member And a drive unit for generating the parallel link, wherein one arm member of the pair of arm members is disposed on the side surface in the swing axis direction. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a bridging member, the bridging member being capable of being in contact with a side surface of the other arm member of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a moving member that is movable by swinging along parallel links (see, for example, JP 2012-210238A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the pair of arm members forming the parallel link may be displaced in the swing axis direction during the rotation of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the bridging member fixed to the side surface in the swinging axis direction of one arm member is formed to be able to abut on the side surface in the swinging axis direction of the other arm member . In this case, since the movement of the other arm member in the swinging axis direction can be prevented by the bridge member, positional deviation of the pair of arm members in the swinging axis direction can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine D1, while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position, the bridging member always constantly rotates the side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction and the swing axis thereof. A game machine D2 comprising an overlapping portion overlapping in a direction view.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, since the overlapping portion is always formed on the bridging member, the other arm member can always be in contact with the bridging member. Misalignment in the direction of the pivot axis can be reliably prevented.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the drive device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the one arm member, and the one end of the one arm member has a swing shaft at one end thereof. And a passive gear portion engaged with the transmission gear, the gear teeth being formed in an arc shape around the transmission rocking shaft, and disposed opposite to the base member of the one arm member The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a side face of the game machine and the transmission gear are formed so as to be in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the transmission gear is disposed between one arm member and the base member, and the side face disposed opposite to the base member of one arm member is Since it is possible to abut on the transmission gear, it is possible to prevent one end of one arm member from being displaced (posture change) in the swing axis direction.

  In addition, the side face of the one end of one arm member opposed to the base member is in contact with the transmission gear, and the transmission gear is rotated, whereby one end of one arm member is the base member. The swing resistance of one of the arm members can be reduced as compared to the case of contact. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously prevent the positional shift of the one arm member in the swinging axis direction and reduce the swinging resistance.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the one arm member is formed in an area smaller than the area of the one end of the one arm member, and the small arm disposed between the one arm member and the base member A game machine D4 comprising an area member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the contact area between the base member and the one arm member is reduced by the small area member, thereby shaking the one arm member. Dynamic resistance is reduced. Thereby, the driving force of the driving device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the small area member is formed in a shape including a longitudinal direction and a short direction formed shorter than the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction corresponds to the one end of the one arm member A game machine D5 fixed to the one arm member in a posture along a direction connecting the other end.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the small area member has one arm in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the direction connecting one end of one arm member to the other end. The contact area between the small-area member and the base member along the direction connecting the one end of one arm member to the other end is fixed to the member and the other end of the one arm member is enlarged. Can move closer to or away from the base member to improve the resistance to deformation of one of the arm members.

  Further, by making the small area member into a shape including the longitudinal direction and the short direction, the contact area between one arm member and the base member is reduced as compared with the case where the small area member is formed into a circular shape with a large diameter. Can.

  In the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the small area member is a different shape formed of a main body circle formed by the diameter in the short side direction and a line drawn from the end in the longitudinal direction to the main body circle. A straight line connecting the transmission rocking axis of the one arm member and the rotation axis of the transmission gear always intersects the outer portion of the main body circle in the outer shape of the small area member. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the main body circular portion formed by the diameter in the short direction of the small area member is the transmission swing axis of one arm member and the rotation of the transmission gear. Since it always intersects with the straight line connecting the axis, even if the distance between the small area member and the transmission gear is the same, the straight line connecting those axes is from the longitudinal end of the small area member to the body circle As compared with the case of crossing the drawn line, the contact area between the transmission gear and the side surface of the one arm member on the base member side can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to suppress one of the arm members from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the passive gear portion is axially extended along the opposite side surface of the transmission gear in the rocking axial direction side surface, and the gear teeth of the passive gear portion are The transmission gear is formed in a two-stage gear shape in which gears are stacked in two stages, and the first gear portion of the first stage includes the one arm member and the base. And the second gear portion of the second stage is formed so as to be engaged with the passive gear portion and to be able to abut on the umbrella portion in the rotational axis direction of the transmission gear. A game machine D7 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exerted on any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the transmission gear is formed by a double gear, and the first gear portion of the double gear is a base member of one arm member Since the second gear portion can be in contact with the side surface and the second gear portion can be in contact with the umbrella portion of the passive gear portion, the contact point between the transmission gear and one of the arm members can be increased. Thereby, the wobble of one arm member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the first position is an overhanging position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and the umbrella portion faces the radial direction of the passive gear portion and the arm portion of the one arm member A support portion is provided extending beyond the distance between the transmission rocking shaft and the rotation shaft of the transmission member, and the support portion is the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is disposed at the extended position. A game machine D8 that is formed so as to be able to abut on an axial side surface of the second gear portion.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the supporting portion is provided at the second gear portion of the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is disposed at the overhanging position and movement in the rocking axial direction is most likely to occur. Since the contact is formed, the contact can suppress the movement of one of the arm members in the swing axis direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported by the one arm member at two points, and a straight line connecting the supporting points is larger than the longitudinal direction of the one arm member by 90 degrees and 90 degrees A game machine D9 characterized by forming a smaller predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported by one arm member at two points, and the straight line connecting the supporting points is the longitudinal direction of one arm member Since the predetermined angle is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 90 °, the load applied to one of the arm members by the abutment of the other arm member against the bridge member can be rotated around the one arm member in the longitudinal direction. It can be divided into a twisting direction, which is a direction, and a bending direction in which one arm member falls in the longitudinal direction. Thereby, the degree to which one arm member is deformed in one direction can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the bridging members are arranged in parallel in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and the pair of bridging members has substantially the same distance from the one arm member Of the pair of bridging members, the one bridging member closer to the one end of the one arm member is closer to the other end of the one arm member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that deformation resistance is formed to be larger than that of the other bridging member that is the side.

  According to the gaming machine D10, the bridging members are juxtaposed in a pair in the longitudinal direction of one arm member, and one bridging member of the pair of bridging members is compared with the other bridging member. Deformation resistance is formed large. That is, one of the bridging members disposed closer to the base member is more easily deformed than the other bridging member disposed closer to the moving member.

  The bending deformation of the other arm member is such that the other end pivotally supported by the moving member is axially moved by the weight of the moving member or the like with one end pivotally supported by the base member as an axis It is caused by. Therefore, in the case where the pair of bridging members are formed to have substantially the same distance from one of the arm members, the other arm member and the other bridging member are compared with the one bridging member. Get in touch early.

  Here, when the deformation resistance of the other bridge member is as large as that of the one bridge member, a situation occurs in which only the other bridge member receives the load from the other arm member alone, The durability of the bridging member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the other bridging member has a smaller deformation resistance than the one bridging member, and the other arm member By allowing the pair of bridging members to receive a load from the other arm member, the other bridging member is deformed before the second bridge member abuts on the other bridging member. Therefore, since the load from the other arm member can be distributed to be carried by the pair of bridge members, the durability of the pair of bridge members can be improved.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the deformation resistance of the other bridge member compared to the deformation resistance of one bridge member, the materials are made different, and the material of the one bridge member is made different from the material of the other bridge member. A method of using a less rigid material is exemplified. Also, in the case where the materials are the same, there is a method of reducing the cross-sectional coefficient of the other bridge member as compared to the cross-sectional coefficient of the one bridge member, or a method of forming a reinforcing rib in one of the bridge members. Etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D10, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and the fixing portion is fixed to the one arm member and extends adjacent to the fixing portion. And a detent pin portion that abuts against the one arm member at the seat surface in the extending direction, and the fixing portion of the one bridging member is the detent pin portion The other bridge member is disposed apart from the other arm member, and the other bridge member is characterized in that the fixed portion is disposed closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion. Gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, the bridging member includes the fixing portion fixed to one of the arm members, and the detent pin portion that abuts on the one arm member at the seat surface.

  One of the bridge members is arranged such that the fixed portion is separated from the other arm member than the locking pin portion (the locking pin portion is disposed between the fixed portion and the other arm member) . Therefore, when the other arm member abuts on the one bridging member and the one bridging member is flipped starting from the fixing portion, the locking pin portion separates from the one arm member.

  On the other hand, in the other bridging member, the fixing portion is disposed closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion (i.e., the fixing portion is disposed between the detent pin portion and the other arm member) Will be set). Therefore, when the other arm member abuts on the other bridge member and the other bridge member is flipped starting from the fixed portion, the seat surface of the locking pin moves in a direction to be pressed against the one arm member .

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, the seat surface of the locking pin portion is pressed against one arm member and the deformation resistance is increased, compared to one bridging member. The other bridging member can be less likely to be turned over.

  Here, "to be turned up" means that the bridge member receives force from the other arm member and peels off from the one arm member.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member is a columnar portion inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member, and the bridging member of the one bridging member The game is characterized in that the embedding depth of the fixing portion of the other bridging member in the one arm member is deeper than the embedding depth of the fixing portion in the one arm member. Machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member is provided with a fixed portion fixed to one arm member, and the embedding depth of the fixed portion in one arm member is Since the other bridge member is deeper than the one bridge member, the other bridge member can be firmly fixed to the one arm member as compared to the one bridge member, The other bridging member can be less likely to be turned over as compared to the bridging member.

  In any one of the game machines D10 to D12, the bridging member is a columnar portion inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member, and the fixing portion is fixed after the fixing. The length at which the fixing portion of the other bridging member protrudes from the side surface of the one arm member as compared to the length at which the fixing portion of the one bridging member protrudes from the side surface of the one arm member The game machine D13 characterized in that it is shorter.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D10 to D12, after the bridging member is provided with a fixing portion and the fixing portion is fixed to one arm member, the fixing portion is one Because the other bridge member is shorter in length projecting from the arm member as compared to the one bridge member, the length of the other bridge member relative to the one bridge member is smaller than that of the one bridge member. The deformation resistance can be increased. Therefore, the other bridge member can be made more difficult to turn up than the one bridge member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D10 to D13, the other in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member as compared to the section coefficient of the one bridging member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member. A gaming machine D14 characterized in that a cross section coefficient of the bridging member is larger.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D10 to D13, compared to the cross section coefficient of one bridging member in the direction of the load given from the other arm member, from the other arm member Since the cross section coefficient of the other bridge member in the direction of the applied load is formed larger, the deformation resistance of one bridge member is different due to the difference in shape between the one bridge member and the other bridge member. In comparison, the deformation resistance of the other bridging member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, the bridging member includes a projecting portion projecting from a side surface that is in contact with the other arm member, and the projecting portion is the moving member When arranged in one position, it can contact with the other arm member, and when the movable member is arranged in the second position, it can not contact with the other arm member. A game machine D15 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D15, a projecting portion is provided to project from the bridging member. The projecting portion can be in contact with the other arm member when the moving member is disposed at the first position, and is in contact with the other arm member when the moving member is disposed at the second position. It is considered impossible.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D14, when the moving member is disposed at the first position, the distance between the bridging member and the other arm member is The other arm member can be brought into contact with the bridge member from the inside in which the deformation of the other arm member in the swinging axis direction can be made smaller. On the other hand, when the moving member is disposed at the second position, a large distance between the bridging member and the other arm member is secured, and resistance when moving the moving member from the second position is increased. It can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, for example, when the moving member is disposed at the first position, the moving amount of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is large, while the moving member is disposed at the second position. Is effective when, for example, the amount of movement of the other arm member in the swinging axis direction is small enough to be ignored. That is, for example, when the moving member is disposed at the first position, a load is applied from the moving member in a direction to bend the other arm member along the longitudinal direction, while the moving member is disposed at the second position In this case, it is effective when a load is applied from the moving member in the direction in which the other arm member is twisted along the lateral direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, compared with the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member, the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member A gaming machine D16 characterized in that it is thinner.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, a portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member as compared to the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member Since the width of the bridging member in the above is formed to be smaller, the other arm member and the bridging member abut each other, and when the bridging member is deformed, one arm member and the other arm member are connected in series. It is possible to prevent the bridge member from being twisted about the direction of the axis.

  That is, the deformation of the bridging member can be easily limited to the bending deformation along the direction in which one arm member and the other arm member are connected. Therefore, for example, when forming a portion for improving the deformation resistance against bending or twisting of the bridging member, the arrangement can be limited to a portion that increases the resistance of the bending deformation of the bridging member, The configuration of the members can be simplified.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D16, the moving member is supported above the base member when the moving member is disposed in at least one of the first position or the second position, and the center of gravity of the moving member Is formed at a position closer to the other arm member than the one arm member and at a position separated from the other arm member on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member A game machine D17 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine D17, the center of gravity of the moving member is closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and the other arm member is on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. It is formed in the position away from. Therefore, when the moving member is supported above the base member, the weight of the moving member is greater on the other arm member than on the one arm member. In this case, the other arm member can be easily bent as compared with the one arm member.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the pair of arm members is bent by the weight of the moving member, the other arm member is in contact with the bridging member. It can be made easy, and it can suppress that position shift of a pair of arm members arises because the direction of one arm member is bent to the bridge member side compared with the other arm member.

<An example of a technical idea of irradiating light from the outside of the game area to the inclusion of the game area>
A game machine comprising: a rail member forming an outer frame of a game area; and an irradiation device disposed outside of the rail member and irradiating light inward of the rail member, the irradiation device The light emitted from the light travels on the back side of the rail member. A game machine E1.

  There is a gaming machine which is disposed inward of the gaming area in front view and emits light from the back side of the gaming area, and there is a gaming machine which effects by the irradiation apparatus (see, for example, JP 2012-081031). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a cover member for blindfolding is provided in front of the irradiation device in order to prevent the irradiation device such as the LED from being visually recognized in a front view inward of the game area. Because it is necessary to paint the board, there is a problem that the design freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, an irradiation device for emitting light to the inside of the game area through the back side of the rail member forming the outer frame of the game area is disposed outside the rail member. Since it is possible to prevent the illuminating device such as the LED from being exposed in the inside of the game area, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the decoration of the game area.

  Note that the irradiation device can be made invisible from the front by arranging the irradiation device arranged outside the game area on the back side of the plate member such as the outer edge member.

  In the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is emitted toward the big winning opening where the ball wins, and the advancing direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side at the outer edge of the big winning opening. A game machine E2 characterized in that a direction change portion for changing the direction to the direction is formed.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outward of the rail member, in order to direct the emitted light to the player side, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front direction. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiator can be disposed is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiator toward the front. Therefore, a change member is required to reflect the light emitted from the irradiation device and change the traveling direction to the front direction, and the change member is disposed inward of the game area. In this case, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolding or to paint the board in front of the change member in order to prevent the change member from being exposed in the front view. It has the problem that the design freedom of the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is irradiated toward the big winning opening, and the outer edge of the big winning opening is irradiated from the irradiation device A direction change portion is formed to change the traveling direction of light in the direction toward the front side, but the outer edge of the big winning opening is a portion to be aimed by the player for winning the ball, and may be exposed in front view Since this is a possible part, it is possible to eliminate the need for a cover member or the like for the blindfold, and to improve the design freedom of the decoration of the game area.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the direction change portion is formed on the outer edge of the big winning opening, the wall surface of the opening of the big winning opening is formed to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting light irradiated from the irradiation device toward the front side. And a mode in which the upper lid member for opening and closing the large winning opening is formed at an angle at which the light emitted from the irradiation device can be reflected toward the front side.

  In the gaming machine E2, it is possible to form a closed state in which the flow path of the ball to the big winning opening is closed and an open state in which the flow path of the ball to the big winning opening is open. The upper lid member includes an upper lid member to be formed, and the upper lid member includes the direction changing portion, and the upper lid member forms either the closed state or the open state in either of the direction changing portion. A game machine E3 characterized in that light emitted from the irradiation device reaches.

  Here, it is difficult to dispose the irradiation device such as the LED on the upper lid member disposed in the special winning opening because the upper lid member is enlarged. Therefore, it was difficult to make the upper lid member emit light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the direction change unit which directs the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device to the front side And the upper lid member that forms the outer edge of the big winning opening, so that the player can visually recognize the light emitting direction change part of the upper lid member, and the enlargement of the upper lid member is suppressed It is possible to improve the ability of the upper lid member as a rendering part.

  In addition, since the state of the upper cover member is switched to change whether or not the light reaches the direction change portion, it is confirmed whether the direction change portion of the upper cover member is viewed as if it is emitting light. It is possible to check if the special winning opening is open or closed. This makes it easy to check the state of the special winning opening.

  Note that as a mode in which whether or not the light reaches the direction change portion changes when the state of the upper lid member is switched, a mode in which a member capable of shielding the light is provided before reaching the direction change portion, The aspect etc. which turn on-off the output of an irradiation apparatus according to the switching of the state of an upper cover member are illustrated.

  As an aspect of forming the upper lid member, an aspect of sliding in and out in the back and forth direction of the game area, and an aspect in which a pair of opposing long plate members swing on an axis parallel to the front and back direction are exemplified.

  The gaming machine E3 is provided with a shielding portion formed so as to be capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiation device, and when the big winning opening forms one of the open state and the closed state, the irradiation is performed from the irradiation device When the light reaches the direction changing portion while the big winning opening forms the other of the open state or the closed state, the light irradiated from the irradiation device toward the direction changing portion is blocked by the shielding portion. A game machine E4 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the shielding portion is formed in a mode capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiation device, depending on whether the big winning opening is closed or opened. Whether the light irradiated from the irradiation device toward the direction change part reaches the direction change part or the light does not reach the direction change part by arranging the shielding part between the irradiation device and the direction change part Since the upper cover member is changed, it is possible to change the visible state as if the direction change portion of the upper cover member is emitting light only by the operation required to continue the game on the upper cover member. Therefore, the upper lid member can be used for both the role of controlling the passage of the ball to the big winning opening and the role of performing effects by the light emitted from the irradiation device.

  In addition, as a shielding part, the metal rail member which divides a game area, the painted part painted on the board surface of a game board, the decoration board etc. which are projected on the front side from the board surface of a game board etc. are illustrated. That is, when the shielding portion is formed of a rail member, the rail member is used for the purpose of forming the outer frame of the game area and the purpose as a shielding portion.

  The gaming machine E3 or E4 is provided with a front plate member which is disposed on the front side of the big winning opening and which reaches the direction changing portion and to which the light whose traveling direction is changed reaches. A game machine E5 characterized in that the large winning opening is covered in a front view, and the direction changing portion condenses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which a front plate member is disposed on the front side of the big winning opening, and the front plate member covers the big winning opening in a front view. In such a gaming machine, visual recognition of the inside of the big winning opening can be suppressed, and the design freedom of the inside of the big winning opening can be improved. On the other hand, in this case, since the light irradiated from the irradiation device to the big winning opening is visually recognized through the front plate member, it is necessary to increase the light intensity to maintain the rendering effect by the light irradiated from the irradiation device And there is a problem that the usable irradiation device is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the direction changing portion for changing the traveling direction of light toward the front plate member collects the light in a predetermined portion of the front plate member Since the light is emitted, the intensity of light reaching a predetermined portion of the front plate member can be increased without changing the irradiation device.

  In addition, as an aspect which condenses light, an aspect in which the direction change part is formed in the shape of a box and the side facing the front plate member is opened, or the direction change part is formed in a parabola and the side facing the front plate member is open And the like.

  In any one of game machines E3 to E5, when the big winning opening forms the open state, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the ball winning to the big winning opening is A game machine E6 characterized in that the light irradiated from the irradiation device is blocked from reaching the direction changing portion by crossing the light irradiated from the irradiation device.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the special winning opening is opened, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction change portion, and the special winning opening Because the light emitted from the irradiation device blocks reaching the direction change portion by crossing the light emitted from the irradiation device by the ball that has won a prize, the direction change portion is visually recognized as bright or dark , It can be confirmed that the ball has won the big winning opening. As a result, for example, even when the big winning opening is not visible in front view, it is possible to confirm that the ball has been won to the big winning opening by visually recognizing the light emitted from the irradiation device. There is no need to look into the winning opening obliquely from above, and the burden on the player can be alleviated.

  Here, for example, when the irradiation direction of the light faces the flow-down direction of the ball, the light is shielded by the first ball even when one ball is won in the large winning opening or when plural balls are won in a row. It is difficult to determine the number of balls that have won a prize by using light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the ball crosses the light emitted from the irradiation device, so that the ball and the light face each other Unlike in the case of flowing down along the irradiation direction of (1), the light emitted from the irradiation device is blocked for each of the balls awarded to the big winning opening. In this way, even when balls are winning in a row at the big winning opening, it is possible to block the light with each ball, and it is possible to determine the number of balls that have been winning at the big winning opening by the light.

  In addition, since the sphere crosses the light, the ball that has won the big winning opening is more in comparison with the case where the flow-down direction of the ball faces the traveling direction of the light, or the ball flows down along the irradiation direction of the light. The period for shielding light can be shortened, and the period during which the direction change portion can be seen bright can be extended, so that the rendering ability of the direction change portion can be secured.

  The gaming machine E6 includes a front plate member disposed on the front side of the large winning opening and reaching the direction changing portion to which light whose traveling direction is changed arrives, and the direction changing portion includes the front plate The game machine E7 is characterized in that light is condensed on a predetermined portion of the member, and the irradiation device is formed in a mode of irradiating light from a plurality of places, and the balls individually cross the light irradiated from the respective places. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the gaming machine E7 is provided with a front plate member disposed on the front side of the big winning opening and reaching the direction changing portion to reach the light whose traveling direction has changed. The direction change unit condenses the light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member. For example, when light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the irradiation device, the light of the color actually irradiated and the light of each color are combined. The colored light can be viewed through the front plate member.

  In addition, the irradiation device is formed in such a manner that light is irradiated from a plurality of places, and since the sphere individually travels the light irradiated from each place, the light irradiated to the front plate member according to the timing when the sphere flows down The aspect of can be varied.

  For example, consider a case where the irradiation device has a pair of places for emitting light, one side emits "blue" light, and the other side emits "red" light. In this case, the light condensed on the front plate member can be visually recognized as "blue", "purple (overlapping part)", and "red".

  Here, when the sphere flows down in a manner to cross the light emitted from one of the places to block the light, the light of "blue" color is shielded, so that the front plate member has a "red" color. Only the light of is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere flows down in a manner to cross the light emitted from the other place and the light is blocked, the light of the "red" color is blocked, so the front plate member has a "blue" color. Only light is visible.

  As described above, the aspect of the light visually recognized by the front plate member can be changed depending on from which point the sphere shields the light emitted. Since the change in the aspect of the light is caused by a ball flowing down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the aspect of the light can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change of the aspect of the light irradiated from the irradiation device is generated by the electronic control, it is possible to perform the rendering with more randomness, and it is possible to improve the rendering effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E7, the large winning opening is disposed below the center of the gaming area, and the lower edge of the rail member forms an opening lower side of the large winning opening. Machine E8.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a large winning opening is disposed below the liquid crystal display device (see, for example, JP 2012-210238A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, an out port is formed at the lower edge of the gaming area, and the liquid crystal display device is formed above the large winning opening disposed above it, so the large winning opening There is a problem in that the driving device of the above-mentioned item prevents the lowering of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device and inhibits the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, the lower edge of the rail member forms the lower opening side of the big winning opening. In this case, by forming the opening on the basis of the lowermost point of the rail member, both left and right end portions of the opening can be formed to protrude downward from the game area, compared with the case where the lower side of the opening is formed by a straight line A big winning opening can be formed in a space-saving manner.

  In addition, the large winning opening is disposed in the area including the lower edge of the rail member where the out opening is generally disposed, thereby lowering the position of the driving device configured on the back of the large winning opening. To lower the lower edge of the liquid crystal display.

  In the gaming machine E8, a first out port disposed on one side in the left-right direction of the big winning opening and discharging a ball out of the gaming area, and a ball disposed on the other side in the left-right direction of the big winning opening The second out port for discharging out of the area, the closed state for closing the ball flow path to the big winning port while being disposed above the big winning port, and the ball flow path for the big winning port And an upper lid member capable of forming an open state to be opened, wherein upper sides of the first and second out ports are formed above an upper surface of an end of the upper lid member and the first The lower end of the out port and the second out port is formed lower than the upper surface of the end portion of the upper cover member, whereby the first out is formed along the upper surface of the upper cover member in the closed state of the winning opening. That the ball can flow down to the mouth or the second out Game machine E9 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the upper sides of the first and second out ports are formed above the upper surface of the end portion of the upper lid member and the first and second out ports. Since the lower side of the out port is formed lower than the upper surface of the end of the upper lid member, the upper lid member can be removed from the first out port while allowing balls to be discharged from the first out port or the second out port. And it can be lowered to the same position as the second out.

  In the gaming machine E9, the upper side surface of the upper cover member is formed in a shape inclining downward in both left and right directions.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, the upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed to be inclined downward and downward in both the left and right directions. it can. Thus, the nail formed in the game area and causing the ball to flow downward toward the big winning opening can be translated downward, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal display can be lowered downward.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the upper lid member is formed with a plurality of ribs protruding on the lower side.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the rigidity of the upper lid member is increased by forming the ribs on the lower side surface of the upper lid member, and the falling of the upper lid member due to the weight of the ball is prevented can do.

  In the gaming machine E11, among the plurality of ribs, the ribs formed on the inner side of the large winning opening are formed on the back side of the gaming area in a state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. A game machine E12 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E11, the ribs formed inside the large winning opening are formed on the back side of the gaming area in the state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. It can flow down to the lower part of the upper lid member, and the upper and lower width in which the ball is arranged on the front side of the big winning opening can be sufficiently secured. That is, interference between the rib and the ball can be prevented.

  In any one of the game machines E9 to E12, before the balls flowing down toward the first out port or the second out port reach the first out port or the second out port, the direction of the balls is changed to the first out port or the second out port. A game machine E13 provided with a ball direction adjustment unit that directs in the opening direction of one out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E9 to E12, the ball orientation adjustment unit directs the ball to the opening direction of the first out port or the second out port. It can be made easy to discharge to 1 out outlet or 2nd out outlet. Thereby, since the opening width of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed, in the case where the big winning port, the first out port, and the second out port are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, It can be lowered below the game area.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of light emitted from the irradiation device to a direction toward the front side, the board surface forming the back of the game area is formed of transparent resin, and the direction change A game machine E14 characterized in that the unit is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outward of the rail member, in order to direct the emitted light to the player side, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front direction. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiator can be disposed is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiator toward the front. Therefore, a change member is required to reflect the light emitted from the irradiation device and change the traveling direction to the front direction, and the change member is disposed inward of the game area. In this case, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolding or to paint the board in front of the change member in order to prevent the change member from being exposed in the front view. It has the problem that the design freedom of the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the board surface forming the back of the gaming area is formed of transparent resin, and the traveling direction of the light irradiated from the irradiation device is directed to the front side Since the direction change portion to be changed in the direction is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board, it is inconspicuous even when the direction change portion is visually recognized in the front view, which affects the decoration of the game area Can be made smaller. Thereby, the design freedom of the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the direction change part is formed on the board, an aspect in which the board is cut, an aspect in which the board is drilled, an aspect in which a nail is screwed into the board, a direction change part in the resin mold of the board The method etc. which form a recessed part in a molded article are illustrated by forming the protrusion corresponding to.

  The gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the light emitted from the irradiation device, the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the direction changing portion, is irradiated from below to a member provided protruding from the board. Game machine E15.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E13, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the direction changing portion, is a member projected from the board from below Since the illumination is performed, the illumination of the hole can brighten the shadow formed below the member protruding from the panel surface by the light emitted from the irradiation device. As a result, the rendering ability of the area under the member protruding from the board can be improved, and the ball can be seen more easily when the ball passes through the area under the member protruding from the board Therefore, it is possible to ease the burden felt by the player by making the ball hard to see.

  In addition, a nail, a windmill, a through gate, etc. are illustrated as a member protrudingly provided from the panel surface.

<Point for adjusting whether or not the rib abuts during movement of the wing member>
A base member, a first moving means supported by the base member and reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position, and a second movement supported by at least the first moving means Means, and driving means for driving the first moving means, wherein the first state in which the second moving means moves relative to the first moving means in the first direction is compared with the first state In the gaming machine which forms the second state in which the resistance at the time of relative movement between the first moving means and the second moving means increases, the switching between the first state and the second state is: A game machine F1 characterized in that the second moving means receives load from at least the first moving means and moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first moving means, and a second moving means supported by the first moving means so as to be movable relative to the first moving means, and the second moving means There is a gaming machine provided with a second drive motor for driving the second moving means in order to change the operation resistance at the time of relative movement with respect to the first moving means (see, for example, JP-A-2011-147471). According to this gaming machine, for example, when it is desired to reduce the operating resistance of the second moving means to the first moving means, the power transmission of the second drive motor is canceled to reduce the resistance and increase the operating resistance. In this case, the attitude of the second moving means can be fixed by utilizing the power transmission of the second drive motor. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the weight of the first moving means for disposing the second drive motor is heavier than the weight of the second drive motor. In this case, there is a risk that the size of the first drive motor for driving the first moving means may be increased, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in the arrangement is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the switching between the first state and the second state in which the resistance at the time of relative movement of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means is different is at least the first moving of the second moving means. Since it is carried out by receiving a load from the means and moving it, it becomes possible to reduce the weight of the second moving means since it becomes unnecessary to have another drive device for changing the resistance at the time of relative movement of the second moving means. .

  The manner in which the second moving means moves relative to the first moving means is not particularly limited. For example, relative movement in the direction along the movement direction of the first moving means may be used, or relative movement in the direction crossing the movement direction of the first moving means may be used. Also, movement along a straight line or movement along a curve may be used.

  In the gaming machine F1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is switched by passing the third position which is a position between the first position and the second position. The game machine F2 to do.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the first moving means moves the third position, which is a position between the first position and the second position, to the load mode received by the second moving means. Since switching by passing is performed, it is possible to suppress a shift in timing at which the state is switched during movement of the first moving means, as compared to the case where the operating resistance of the second moving means is changed by another driving force.

  In addition, since the change of the state occurs when the first moving means passes the third position, switching between the first state and the second state can be performed regardless of the speed of the first moving means. Therefore, the effect of switching between the first state and the second state can be performed without being limited to the operation speed of the first moving means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a first base supporting the first moving means, and a second base supporting the second moving means, the first moving means including the second base In the second state, the second moving means is in contact with the contact means, and the second base is provided with the first moving means in the second state. A game machine F3 supporting the second moving means on the opposite side of the contact means on the basis of supporting the second moving means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first state and the second state are changed depending on whether or not the second moving means abuts on the contact means of the first moving means. Since the second moving means can be changed by receiving a tensile load from the second base, whether or not the abutted state is maintained can be changed, so that the second moving means can be separated from the first moving means. The driving force can be received by the second base, and the load on the driving device can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect of the displacement of the second moving means, the aspect of the displacement in which the second moving means changes its posture with respect to the first moving means, and the displacement of the second moving means in parallel with respect to the first moving means Aspects are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine F3, the second moving means is configured to move along the depth direction in the player's viewpoint in the change between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the second moving means moves along the depth direction in the player's viewpoint in the change of the first state and the second state. Compared to the case of changing along the orthogonal direction, it is difficult for the player to grasp the change, and it is possible to prevent the sense of discomfort from being produced in the effects by the first moving means and the second moving means with the switching of the state. can do.

  The mode of movement of the second moving means along the depth direction in the player's viewpoint is not particularly limited. For example, it may be a tilting operation centering on a support point with the base member or parallel movement in the depth direction.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the abutment means is compared to a portion disposed on the opposite side of the second base of the point at which the second moving means is supported by the first moving means in the second state. A portion of the point at which the second moving means is supported by the first moving means in the first state and which is located on the opposite side of the second base is a height at which the first moving means is protruded Gaming machine F5 characterized in that it decreases.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, changing the height of the projecting means of the contact means makes the first state be the second moving means in comparison with the second state. And the abutment means can be made difficult to abut. Thereby, the change between the first state and the second state can be caused while maintaining the interval between the first moving means and the second moving means, so that the first moving means and the second moving means Compared to the case where the interval between the two changes, it is difficult for the player to grasp the change, and it is possible to prevent the sense of discomfort from being produced in the effects by the first moving means and the second moving means with the switching of the state. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the first moving means is arranged such that the portion opposite to the second base of the point supporting the second moving means is closer to the second moving means. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is configured in a projecting manner.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the portion facing the second moving means of the first moving means, the portion in contact with the second moving means is stretched in advance. By pulling out, the second moving means and the first moving means can be easily brought into contact with each other by the extension, and the friction when the second moving means is in contact with the first moving means by being inclined by gravity. The power can be increased.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the 1st movement means does not project, the range of the gravity center position of the 2nd movement means which can secure frictional resistance between the 2nd movement means and the 1st movement means can be extended. That is, the frictional resistance can be easily ensured even when the deviation width of the center of gravity position of the second moving means from the support point of the second moving means in the first moving means is small. Therefore, the design freedom of the center-of-gravity position of the second moving means can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the second base includes a support base fixed to the game machine, and displacement means supported displaceably by the support pedestal and supporting the second moving means. A game machine F7, wherein the displacement means reaches an end of a displaceable area while the first movement means is moving in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the displacing means is at the end of the displaceable area of the support pedestal while the first moving means is moving in the first direction. Since it reaches, it is possible to easily apply a load from the displacement means of the second base to the second movement means during the movement of the first movement means.

<Switching between posture maintenance of second moving means and easy operation by change of center of gravity position>
A base member, a first moving means supported by the base member and reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position, and a second movement supported by at least the first moving means Means, and driving means for operating the first moving means, the second moving means is provided with the pivoting means, and the game is displaceably supported by the first moving means via the pivoting means A first state in which the second moving means moves between a second attitude in which the pivoting means is inclined relative to the first attitude and the first attitude relative to the first moving means, and The second moving means forms a second state in which the second moving means stops in the second posture, the first state and the second state are switched during the movement of the first moving means, and the gravity is changed in the second state. , Maintaining the second moving means in the second posture In the first state, the horizontal distance between the pivot means and the center of gravity of the second moving means is equal to or less than the horizontal distance between the pivot means and the center of gravity of the second moving means in the second state. The change in the horizontal distance between the pivot means and the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means is caused by the second moving means being displaced by receiving at least the load from the first moving means. A game machine G1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second moving means is disposed in the first moving means, and only the first moving means operates and the second moving means does not operate; and the first moving means There is a gaming machine which is formed by switching to a first state in which both the second moving means operate and the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-147471). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the second moving means is left without a load, the second moving means operates with the momentum of the operation of the first moving means, so it is difficult to form the second state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is necessary to place on the first moving means a switching means for switching whether or not the relative movement of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means is suppressed. In this case, the driving force for operating the first moving means needs to be as large as the weight of the switching means, or when the switching means operates electrically, the wiring for supplying electricity to the switching means is complicated. There was a problem of becoming

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the second state in which the second moving means is stopped in the second attitude, the gravity of the second moving means works to maintain the second moving means in the second attitude, while In the first state in which the second moving means is moved between the second attitude and the first attitude, the gravity center position of the second moving means and the pivotal means are configured to be closer in the horizontal direction than in the second state. As a result, the way in which the second moving means is loaded with gravity changes. Therefore, since the easiness of relative movement of the second moving means to the first moving means can be changed, it is unnecessary to place the switching means on the first moving means, and the first moving means and the second moving means And the total weight can be reduced. Thus, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced, and the driving means can be miniaturized.

  In particular, in the second posture, which is a tilted posture, as compared with the first posture, the horizontal distance from the pivoting means of the center of gravity position of the second moving means is increased, whereby the second moving means Since the action of pushing back to the second posture is increased, the action of maintaining the second moving means in the second posture can be secured.

  In addition, the movement of the center of gravity of the second moving means with respect to the pivot means occurs when the second moving means receives a load from at least the first moving means and is displaced. Thus, there is no need to supply electricity on the first moving means, and the electrical wiring can be simplified.

  Here, the change between the first state and the second state can also be produced, for example, by causing magnetic attraction between the first moving means and the second moving means. However, in this case, there is a possibility that the second moving means may shake greatly or operate at a high speed due to a reaction at the time of removing the adsorption by the magnetic force, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, when switching the state by changing the position of the center of gravity, there is no reaction to the second moving means at the time of changing the state, and there is no risk of the second moving means operating at high speed. It can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is changed by passing the first moving means through a third position disposed between the first position and the second position. The game machine G2 which features.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the relative movement between the first moving means and the second moving means can be made to coincide based on the change in position of the first moving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing of state change between the first moving means and the second moving means from being shifted, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort in the effects of the first moving member and the second moving member. it can.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first moving means moves the third position, which is a position between the first position and the second position, to the load mode received by the second moving means. Since switching by passing is performed, it is possible to suppress a shift in timing at which the state is switched while the first moving means is moving, as compared with the case where the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is changed by another driving force. In addition, since the change of the state occurs when the first moving means passes the third position, it is possible to switch the aspect of the load regardless of the speed of the first moving means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the base member includes a first base supporting the first moving means, and a second base supporting the second moving means, and the second moving means has one end. A portion is rotatably supported by the first moving means, and the other end is rotatably supported by the second base and is suspended from the second base in the first state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, since the other end of the second moving means is suspended in the first state, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, some percentage of the weight of the second moving means is used as the base member Since it can apply, the driving force for driving a 1st moving means and a 2nd moving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the first moving means is started to rise, the supporting portion for the first moving means of the second moving means is displaced relative to the first moving means downward. Gaming machine G4.

  If the weight at the center of gravity of the second moving means is increased, the load on the driving means for driving the first moving means increases when moving the first moving means together with the second moving means, thereby moving at high speed Is difficult. Therefore, if the driving force of the driving means can not be increased, the operating speed desired for the first moving means limits the weight of the center-of-gravity position of the second moving means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the supporting portion of the second moving means and the first moving means is the first moving means when the first moving means starts rising. Since the relative displacement to the lower side is performed, the weight of the second moving means put on the first moving means can be reduced at the time of starting the first moving means to rise.

  In addition, for example, when adsorption by magnetic force occurs between the first moving means and the second moving means, resistance by the adsorption force occurs regardless of the operation direction of the second moving means, but if it is a load by gravity, gravity Since only resistance occurs in the direction, the relative displacement of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means can reduce the load applied to the first moving means from the second moving means.

  In any one of the game machines G2 to G4, the pivot means is supported by a guide portion extending downward with a component directed in the horizontal direction, and along with the upward movement of the first moving means, A game machine G5 characterized in that the pivotal support means operates in such a manner as to move the guide section downward.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the rising movement of the first moving means is used while suppressing the rising movement speed of the pivotal support based on the rising movement of the first moving means. Since the second moving means can be moved in a direction different from the moving direction of the first moving means by displacing the pivotally supporting means of the second moving means in the lateral direction, it is as if the first moving means and the first moving means It can appear as if the two moving means and another drive device are operating, and the effect can be improved while reducing the number of the drive devices.

  In addition, the aspect extended downward by having the component which faced the horizontal direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be extended along the direction which inclines downward on a straight line, or may be extended stepwise.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the pivot means includes an area which moves with a lateral velocity component having the same magnitude as the rising velocity of the first moving means based on the upward movement of the first moving means. A game machine G6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G4 or G5, based on the upward movement of the first moving means, the pivot means has a lateral velocity similar in magnitude to the ascending speed of the first moving means. Since the region moving by the component is included, changing the center-of-gravity position of the second moving means while performing an effect of moving at the same speed in two directions of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by the first moving means and the second moving means. Can.

  In the gaming machine G5, a gaming machine G7 characterized in that the guide portion includes a region extending in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the guide portion includes an area extending along the horizontal direction, so in that area, the supporting means for the vertical movement distance of the first moving means The moving distance in the horizontal direction can be secured large, and the moving speed of the center of gravity position in the lateral direction can be increased. Thereby, the period which maintains the gravity center position of the 2nd movement means to the 1st position side or the 2nd position side can be lengthened based on a support means, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the 2nd movement means by gravity is extended You can keep it.

  A gaming machine G8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G5, the inclination angle of the guide portion includes a region perpendicular to the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, since the inclination angle of the guide portion includes the area perpendicular to the horizontal direction, when moving the first moving means up and down, It is possible to form an area in which the weight of the moving means does not act as a load for the vertical movement of the first moving means. Thereby, the operation resistance of the first moving means can be reduced, and the operation of the first moving means can be made smooth.

  In any one of the game machines G3 to G8, the second base includes a support pedestal fixed to the game machine, and displacement means supported displaceably by the support pedestal and supporting the second moving means. A game machine G9 characterized in that the displacement means reaches an end of the displaceable area while the first moving means is moving.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G3 to G8, the displacing means reaches the end of the displaceable area of the support pedestal while the first moving means is moving, so It is possible to easily apply a load from the displacement means of the second base to the second movement means during movement of the first movement means.

<Invention of adjusting the speed change of rotation and slide of the slider-crank conversion mechanism>
The rotating means is supported by a rotating means rotating about a rotating shaft, a driving means for driving the rotating means, and a first means disposed on the rotating means away from the rotating shaft. And a slide unit that slides along a first movement line having a component orthogonal to the rotation axis based on rotation, and in the gaming machine, a change rate of an operation speed of the slide unit in a rotational axis direction view A game machine H1 comprising reducing means for reducing the difference between the rate of change of the rotational speed of the rotating means and the rotational speed of the rotating means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine which performs a rotation operation of a rotation unit and a slide operation of a slide unit which reciprocates by a single drive unit (for example, JP-A-2011-030671). reference). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the slide means is operated by the slider crank mechanism, and a shift occurs in the rate of change in speed of the rotational operation of the rotation means and the rate of change in speed of the slide action of the slide means. For example, even when the rotating means is rotating at the same speed, the connecting portion is the sliding means in comparison with the case where the connecting portion between the rotating means and the sliding means moves along the sliding operation direction of the sliding means. When moving along a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction, the change in the movement speed of the sliding means is smaller. In this case, it is difficult to match the speed change of the rotation means with the speed change of the slide means, and in order to match the speed change, it is necessary to drive the rotation means and the slide means by different drive motors. There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the reduction means reduces the difference between the change rate of the rotation speed of the rotation means and the change rate of the operation speed of the slide means in the rotational axis direction view. The effect of operating at the same change rate of the rotational speed of the slider and the operating speed of the slide means can be performed by a single drive motor.

  As the reduction means, the slide means is formed with a support hole in which the support means is accommodated, and the support holes are wide at both ends in the extending direction and narrow at the center in the extending direction. In the case where the support hole is formed from a shape (wedge shape) or the case where the support hole is formed from an elliptical shape in which the central portion is wider than the both end portions in the extending direction.

  In the game machine H1, when the rotation means performs constant speed rotation, the reduction means causes the slide means to perform a constant speed slide operation.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the slide means is configured to slide at a constant speed when the rotation means rotates at a constant speed by the reduction means. The effect by the operation and the effect by the slide operation of the slide means can be easily recognized as one piece, and an effective effect can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the reduction means includes second means fixed to the slide means and formed to be able to abut on the first means of the rotation means, the second means comprising the first means The aspect that the concave depth becomes deeper and the change ratio of the concave depth becomes smaller as the side face in contact with the means approaches the rotation axis of the rotation means along the direction orthogonal to the first movement line A game machine H3 comprising a portion formed from a recessed shape.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, as the second means formed on the slide means gets closer to the rotation axis, the recessed depth becomes deeper and the rate of change of the recessed depth is By providing the portion formed from the concave shape of the smaller aspect, it is possible to absorb the change of the operation speed of the first means in the slide movement direction of the slide operation means, and the change aspect of the slide operation speed of the slide means , It can be close to the change aspect of the rotational speed of the rotation means.

  That is, by setting the change ratio of the recess depth in this way, for example, when the rotating means is rotating at the same speed, a portion where the operating speed along the first movement line of the first means becomes large. The operating speed of the sliding means at a point where the operating speed of the sliding means along the first movement line of the first means decreases (at a point near the rotational axis) by greatly reducing the operating speed of the sliding means (at a point far from the rotational axis) Can be reduced.

  Further, by forming the second means integrated with the slide means in this way, a separate member for adjusting the operating speed of the slide operation means can be dispensed with, and the member cost can be reduced. Moreover, the arrangement space of a member can be suppressed.

  As the second means, the first means may be in contact with the first means in one direction of the sliding movement of the sliding means, for example, may be configured as a wall, or the first means may be in both directions of the sliding movement of the sliding means. It may be contactable, for example, it may be configured as a hole.

  Further, the form of the recess of the second means is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a curved surface, or may be formed from a shape in which two flat surfaces are connected together at the deepest part of the recessed depth to form a valley.

  In the gaming machine H3, a gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second means is configured to contact the first means in a limited manner from one direction of the sliding operation of the sliding means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the second means is configured to abut the first means from one direction of the sliding motion of the sliding means, so that the rotation of the second means The first operation state in which the slide means follows the rotational speed of the second means and the second action in which the slide means can not follow the rotational speed of the second means depending on the magnitude of the speed of the action. Two types of operation states can be configured.

  In the gaming machine H4, the gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the slide means is vertically operated in the same manner by continuously rotating the rotation means regardless of the rotation direction of the rotation means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4, by continuously rotating the rotation means, the mode of the vertical movement of the slide means can be made the same regardless of the rotation direction, By switching the rotation direction of the rotation means, the range in which the first means starts to abut on the second means can be changed while maintaining the operation of the slide means.

  That is, for example, when the rotation means is rotated forward, the first range of the first means is brought into contact when the contact with the second means is started, while the rotation of the rotation means is rotated reversely. Since the second range different from the first range of the first means can be brought into contact at the start of the abutment with the means, compared to the case where the rotation means is always rotated in the same direction, The degree of wear of the first means can be halved. Thereby, the replacement period of the first means can be doubled, and the maintainability can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the first means is formed of a pair of convex portions provided so as to be symmetrical with respect to the rotational axis.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the first means is formed of a pair of convex portions provided so as to be convex on the rotational axis, so that the rotation means makes one rotation. During this time, the convex portion in contact with the second means is replaced, and the slide means can be reciprocated twice. Therefore, when it is desired to increase the number of reciprocation operations of the slide means, it can be realized with a smaller drive speed (half the drive speed) as compared with the case where the first means is formed from a single convex portion. Thereby, the maximum number of revolutions of the drive means can be reduced, and the drive means can be miniaturized. In addition, you may make it comprise a convex provision part not by one pair but by three or more plurality.

  In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, the rotating means is capable of forming a separated state in which the first means is disposed outside the movable area of the second means. Machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H3 to H6, the first means is disposed outside the moving area of the second means when the rotating means is in the separated state. By maintaining the attitude of the rotating means in the separated state, for example, even if the slide means vibrates largely when an impact is given to the gaming machine, the vibration of the slide means causes the first means and the second means to collide with each other. Can be prevented. Thereby, the durability of the second means and the first means can be improved.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The game machine Z1 to do. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine With gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized in that it is a fusion. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
There is a gaming machine provided with a first moving means and a second moving means supported so as to be movable relative to the first moving means, and the second moving means is moved relative to the first moving means For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-147411).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation method of the second moving means.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation method of the second moving means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 comprises a base member and a first movement supported by the base member and formed to be reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position. Means, a second moving means supported by at least the first moving means, and a driving means for driving the first moving means, wherein the second moving means is the first relative to the first moving means. A game in which a first state moving relative to the direction and a second state in which the resistance at the time of relative movement between the first moving means and the second moving means increases compared to the first state In the machine, the switching between the first state and the second state is performed by the second moving means receiving a load from at least the first moving means and moving in a second direction different from the first direction. It occurs.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, an aspect of the load received by the second moving means is that the first moving means is at a position between the first position and the second position. It switches by passing a certain 3rd position.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the base member supports a first base for supporting the first moving means, and a second base for supporting the second moving means. A base, and the first moving means comprises an abutting means disposed to be able to abut on the second moving means, and in the second state, the second moving means is in contact with the abutting means At the same time, the second base supports the second moving means on the opposite side of the contact means on the basis of a point at which the first moving means supports the second moving means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the operation method of the second moving means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the operation method of the second moving means regardless of the operation speed of the first moving means. .
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the operation method of the second moving means is improved by utilizing the load from the second base. can do.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13, 8013 Rails in the game board 61 (rail members)
62 Outer rail (rail member)
65a specific winning combination (large winning combination)
81 3rd Symbol Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
210 Rear case (part of base member)
311c Ball flow rib (ball direction adjustment part)
314 Out Exit (1st Out, 2nd Out)
320 Front plate member 321a Ball flow rib (ball direction adjustment unit)
331c Light irradiator (irradiator)
332 Moving upper lid member (upper lid member)
332a1f Front inclined side (direction change part)
332a3 Guide rib (part of the rib)
332c center rib (part of the rib)
410, 10410, 11410, 12410 Main body members (moving member, first moving member, first moving means)
413, 10413, 11413, 12413 Guide holes (part of support part, part of guide part)
416 Support (First Support)
421, 10421 Swing base member (part of second moving member, part of second moving means)
421c Insertion shaft (one end, part of the support)
422 Decorative member (part of second moving member, part of second moving means)
423, 5423 connecting member (displacement means, part of base member, part of second base)
423b bend (middle part)
423c shaft support bar (second support)
423e Slide shaft (other end)
424, 5424 Guide plate (support pedestal, part of base member, part of second base)
424b, 4424b guide holes (guide route)
430 Swinging member (auxiliary member)
440 Leg member (part of slide mechanism)
450 Guide member (part of base member, first base)
460 Drive device 462 Drive motor (drive means)
480, 9480 Wiring guide arm (wiring auxiliary member)
481, 9481 1st guide arm (arm member)
481a Plate-like arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
481a1 Notch part (concave part)
481b One side tubular part (support part)
481c Other side tubular part (support part)
481c1 Expanded diameter part (second non-contact part)
481d Additive (part of connecting rod, side wall)
481d1 Arc shaped clasp (wall)
481e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
481e2 Other side bottom (shaft bottom)
482, 9482 2nd guide arm (arm member)
482a Plate-like arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
482a1 Arc plate (wall)
482a2 Notch part (concave part)
482b One side tubular part (support part)
482b1 Reduced diameter part (first non-contact part)
482c Other side tubular part (support part)
482d Additive (part of connecting rod, side wall)
482e bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
482e1 one side bottom (shaft bottom)
483 3rd guide arm (arm member)
510, 3510 Base member (base plate)
520, 2520, 3520, 7520 Drive side arm member (arm member)
523 Gear (passive gear)
523a Umbrella 525 color member (small area member)
525a Body part (body circle)
528, 2528, 7528 bridge members 528a, 7528a first bridge member (other bridge member)
528a2 Insertion part (fixed part)
528a3 Auxiliary projection (rotating pin part)
528a4 Rib (protruding part)
528b, 7528b Second bridge member (one bridge member)
528b2 Insertion part (fixed part)
528b3 Auxiliary projection (rotating pin part)
528b4 Rib (protruding part)
530, 7530 Driven arm member (arm member)
540 moving member 550 driving device 553 transmission gear 553a first gear portion 553b second gear portion 720 disc member (rotation means)
722 Rotating shaft 723 Transmission convex part (part of the reciprocating means, part of the first means)
740 Drive (part of drive means)
750, 11750 moving member (part of slide means)
753, 11753 Contact member (part of reduction means, part of contact means)
753a, 11753a Curved part (part of the side surface)
3523b overhang part (support part)
4424c recessed part (braking part)
5425b2 2nd inclined surface (braking part)
6480 Wiring guide slide (wiring auxiliary member)
8013c Direction Changer 8610 Light irradiator (irradiator)
9481d1 Fitting recess (fitting recess)
9481f Detaching front locking member (front locking member)
9481f2 Fitting arm (arm)
9481g Non-slip board part (position gap control part)
9481h Other side auxiliary bottom (extension)
9482f Overhanging front locking part (extension part)
9482g Non-slip board (displacement suppressor)
10413b Support plate (part of contact means)
10421c Insertion shaft (rod-like shaft support means)
C color member (lid member)
CS10 Coil spring (part of reciprocating means)
N rib part (displacement suppression part)
W wiring

Claims (2)

A predetermined member, a first moving means which is configured to reciprocate between its being supported at a predetermined member first position and a second position, a second moving means which is supported on at least the first moving means And driving means for driving the first moving means, wherein a first state in which the second moving means moves relative to the first moving means in a first direction, and comparison with the first state A gaming machine capable of configuring a second state in which resistance during relative movement between the first moving means and the second moving means is increased;
Switching between said second state and said first state,
When the first moving means moves from the first position to the second position, when passing through a third position between the first position and the second position,
Gaming machine where the second moving means, characterized in that occur by moving in a second direction that is different from at least the first accepted before Symbol first direction load from the moving means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box .

Images